ConsoleAdvance RG 897N203543D 5 en

300CL_Reference.
book Page i Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
EN
Console Advance
(DR-ID 300CL)
Introduction
Reference Guide 1 Operation Flow
Version 5 2023-06-08 2 Study Reception
3 Exposure Menu Registration
4 Executing Studies
5 Editing Images
6 List Operation
7 Connected Devices Status
Functions when Using the

8 Mobile PC
9 User Utility Operations
Detailed information about how to use this product as well

as important points to note when using it are provided in
this manual. Before using this product, be sure to read this
manual thoroughly. After reading this manual, keep it
handy for future references. In addition, please be sure to
read the Operation Manual for your understanding of
product overview and its basic operation procedure.
897N203543D
300CL_Reference.book Page ii Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
ii 897N203543D
300CL_Reference.book Page iii Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
Contents at a Glance
Introduction
Chapter 1 Operation Flow
Chapter 2 Study Reception
Chapter 3 Exposure Menu Registration
Contents at a Glance
Chapter 4 Executing Studies
Chapter 5 Editing Images
Chapter 6 List Operation
Chapter 7 Connected Devices Status
Chapter 8 Functions when Using the Mobile PC
Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
897N203543D iii
300CL_Reference.book Page iv Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
Contents
Contents
Contents at a Glance.............................................................................................................. iii
Introduction 1
Chapter 1 Operation Flow 1-1
1.1 Operation Screen ....................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Receiving Studies .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Confirming Study Details................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.3 Executing Studies .......................................................................................... 1-4
1.1.4 Editing Images (QA)....................................................................................... 1-5
1.2 Common Indications and Functions on the Operation Screens ................................. 1-6
1.2.1 Common Indications ...................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2 Common Functions ........................................................................................ 1-8
 Changing login technologist (user) by reading the technologist
barcode ...................................................................................................... 1-8
 Changing login technologist (user) by reading the smart card................... 1-8
 Automatic shutdown................................................................................... 1-9
Chapter 2 Study Reception 2-1
2.1 Study Reception ......................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Patient Information Input Screen.................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Inputting Patient Information .......................................................................... 2-4
 Inputting patient information in the Patient Information Input screen ......... 2-4
 Ending input of patient information to display the Exposure Menu
Selection screen ........................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.3 Patient Information Database Function.......................................................... 2-6
 Input by keyword retrieval .......................................................................... 2-6
 Input by list retrieval ................................................................................... 2-6
 Deletion ...................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2 Study Information List................................................................................................. 2-9
 Display from the “Study screen” and “Image Edit screen” ......................... 2-9
 Primary items ........................................................................................... 2-10
 General items........................................................................................... 2-11
2.3 Version Display ........................................................................................................ 2-12
Chapter 3 Exposure Menu Registration 3-1
3.1 Exposure Menu Registration ...................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Exposure Menu Selection Screen.................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Modifying Exposure Menu.............................................................................. 3-6
 Adding exposure menus ............................................................................ 3-6
 Changing exposure menus ........................................................................ 3-6
 Deleting exposure menus .......................................................................... 3-7
3.1.3 Modifying Patient Information......................................................................... 3-8
iv 897N203543D
300CL_Reference.book Page v Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
Chapter 4 Executing Studies 4-1
4.1 Executing Studies....................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 Study Screen.................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Starting a Study.............................................................................................. 4-5
 Starting studies from the Exposure Menu Selection screen ...................... 4-5
 Starting studies from the “Waiting Study list” ............................................. 4-6
 Settings to get the next study started......................................................... 4-7
4.1.3 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Confirmation and
Modification of Exposure Parameters ............................................................ 4-7
 Setting image rotation/reversal ................................................................ 4-10
 EDR mode ............................................................................................... 4-11
 Function ................................................................................................... 4-12
 Filing mode .............................................................................................. 4-12
 GPR (optional) ......................................................................................... 4-13
Contents
 Radiation Field Setting ............................................................................. 4-15
 Auto-Trimming Setting ............................................................................. 4-16
 Distribution code ...................................................................................... 4-19
 Pixel density (for CR images) .................................................................. 4-20
 Number of film output............................................................................... 4-20
 Switching the panel AP mode connections .............................................. 4-21
4.1.4 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Changing the Order of
Exposure Menus .......................................................................................... 4-21
4.1.5 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Adding Exposure
Menus .......................................................................................................... 4-21
 When adding study exposure menus at startup of multiple studies at the
same time ................................................................................................ 4-23
4.1.6 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Changing Exposure
Menus .......................................................................................................... 4-24
4.1.7 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Setting the Auto-repeat
Exposure ...................................................................................................... 4-26
4.1.8 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Deleting Exposure
Menus .......................................................................................................... 4-27
4.1.9 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Setting the Multi-frame
Format.......................................................................................................... 4-28
4.1.10 Switching between the Flat Panel Sensors.................................................. 4-30
4.2 Reading Images ....................................................................................................... 4-32
 Making an exposure in high sensitivity mode .......................................... 4-34
 Exposures applying extended image readout .......................................... 4-35
4.2.1 Display of Exposure Menus ......................................................................... 4-37
 Using Manual Mode (for power saving) ................................................... 4-37
 Using Auto Mode ..................................................................................... 4-37
4.2.2 Switching Images ......................................................................................... 4-37
4.2.3 Changing the Order of Exposure Menus...................................................... 4-38
4.2.4 Scrolling the Exposure Menu List................................................................. 4-38
4.2.5 Changing Displayed Image .......................................................................... 4-39
4.2.6 Changing the Monitor Mode......................................................................... 4-39
4.2.7 Mammography Image Positioning................................................................ 4-39
 Auto-positioning ....................................................................................... 4-39
897N203543D v
300CL_Reference.book Page vi Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
Contents
 Manual positioning ................................................................................... 4-41

4.2.8 Highlighting Parameters............................................................................... 4-42
4.3 Memory Exposure Mode .......................................................................................... 4-43
4.3.1 Batch Acquisition of Images......................................................................... 4-44
4.3.2 Linking Images and Exposure Menus .......................................................... 4-46
 Image No. ................................................................................................ 4-48
4.3.3 Clearing ImageBox....................................................................................... 4-50
4.4 Performing Re-exposure and Additional Exposure .................................................. 4-51
4.4.1 Re-exposure................................................................................................. 4-51
4.4.2 Additional Exposure ..................................................................................... 4-54
4.5 Editing Images.......................................................................................................... 4-55
 Square monitor ........................................................................................ 4-55
 Wide monitor ............................................................................................ 4-56
 Common specifications for square monitor/wide monitor ........................ 4-57
4.6 Copying Images ....................................................................................................... 4-58
4.7 Image Delivery ......................................................................................................... 4-62
4.7.1 Image-based Distribution ............................................................................. 4-63
 Distribute automatically at each reading .................................................. 4-63
 Distribute the selected images ................................................................. 4-64
 Do not distribute by the image ................................................................. 4-64
4.7.2 Study-based Distribution .............................................................................. 4-65
 Distribute automatically after the study completion.................................. 4-65
 Distribute automatically after the QA completion ..................................... 4-65
4.8 Suspending Studies ................................................................................................. 4-66
 In the case that the image reading has been done for all exposure
menus in the study ................................................................................... 4-66
 In the case that the exposure menus for unread images remain in the
study ........................................................................................................ 4-66
4.9 Completing Studies .................................................................................................. 4-68
 In the case that the image reading has been done for all exposure
menus in the study ................................................................................... 4-68
 In the case that the exposure menus for unread images remain in the
study ........................................................................................................ 4-70
Chapter 5 Editing Images 5-1
5.1 Image Edit Screen...................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Displaying Screen ...................................................................................................... 5-3
 Changing the image/study ......................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Changing GA/GS........................................................................................................ 5-4
5.4 Editing Images............................................................................................................ 5-6
5.4.1 Modifying Order Information........................................................................... 5-6
 Changing exposure menus ........................................................................ 5-7
 Editing exposure technologist information ................................................. 5-8
 Editing the film mark ................................................................................ 5-10
 Editing comments .................................................................................... 5-11
 Changing Incidental Information .............................................................. 5-12
vi 897N203543D
300CL_Reference.book Page vii Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
5.4.2 Rotation/Reversal Settings........................................................................... 5-15

 Flip marker ............................................................................................... 5-16
5.4.3 Modifying the S and L Values ...................................................................... 5-17
 Automatic adjustment of S value and L value .......................................... 5-18
 Manual adjustment of S value and L value .............................................. 5-19
5.4.4 Adjusting Image Processing Parameters ..................................................... 5-20
 GP/RP/DRC settings................................................................................ 5-21
 GP/MFP settings ...................................................................................... 5-23
5.4.5 Adjusting FNC/CRF Processing................................................................... 5-24
 FNC.......................................................................................................... 5-25
 CRF.......................................................................................................... 5-25
5.4.6 Marker/Annotation Settings.......................................................................... 5-26
 Graphical marker settings ........................................................................ 5-27
 Annotation settings .................................................................................. 5-30
5.4.7 Blackening Processing Settings................................................................... 5-33
Contents
5.4.8 Trimming Settings ........................................................................................ 5-35
 Trimming adjustment ............................................................................... 5-35
 Rotating the image by an arbitrary angle ................................................. 5-37
5.4.9 Auto-positioning of Mammographic Images................................................. 5-39
5.4.10 Image Stitching Settings .............................................................................. 5-39
5.4.11 Measurement ............................................................................................... 5-39
 Distance measurement between two points ............................................ 5-42
 Angle measurement between two line segments .................................... 5-45
 Image Operations .................................................................................... 5-46
 Displaying the Version Number ............................................................... 5-48
 Backup and Restore of the Setting Information ....................................... 5-49
5.4.12 Distribution Settings ..................................................................................... 5-52
 Print output............................................................................................... 5-52
 Storage output ......................................................................................... 5-52
5.4.13 Exposure List ............................................................................................... 5-53
5.4.14 QA Main ....................................................................................................... 5-54
5.4.15 QA All Menu ................................................................................................. 5-54
5.4.16 Finalizing and Suspending Image Edits ....................................................... 5-55
5.5 Editing Patient Information ....................................................................................... 5-56
5.6 Using Utility (QA Image Controller Buttons) ............................................................. 5-57
5.6.1 Magnifying Display Image ............................................................................ 5-58
 Activating the image move mode ............................................................. 5-58
 Zoom-in .................................................................................................... 5-58
 Zoom-out.................................................................................................. 5-58
 Actual-size display ................................................................................... 5-59
 1-to-1 pixel-size display ........................................................................... 5-59
 Window-fit display .................................................................................... 5-59
 Full-screen display ................................................................................... 5-59
 Edge highlighting ..................................................................................... 5-59
5.6.2 Changing Parameters .................................................................................. 5-60
5.6.3 Result Data Overlay Display ........................................................................ 5-61
897N203543D vii
300CL_Reference.book Page viii Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
Contents
5.6.4 Locking Study Data ...................................................................................... 5-62

5.6.5 Outputting and Distributing an Image........................................................... 5-62
5.6.6 Setting Mis-exposed Images........................................................................ 5-63
5.6.7 Sending back the study................................................................................ 5-63
5.6.8 Starting up the Image Browse Software....................................................... 5-63
5.7 QA Reset.................................................................................................................. 5-64
5.8 Completing Image Edit ............................................................................................. 5-65
Chapter 6 List Operation 6-1
6.1 List.............................................................................................................................. 6-1

 Items displayed the list............................................................................... 6-1
 Names and functions of buttons ................................................................ 6-2
 Icon names ................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2 List Operation ............................................................................................................. 6-5
 Filtering ...................................................................................................... 6-5
 Search........................................................................................................ 6-5
 Setting the sorting order............................................................................. 6-6
 Updating the list ......................................................................................... 6-7
 Deletion ...................................................................................................... 6-7
 Study resumption/QA start ......................................................................... 6-8
 Scroll .......................................................................................................... 6-9
 Study list query and study list settings ....................................................... 6-9
 Batch delivery .......................................................................................... 6-15
 Outputting in the medical examination format.......................................... 6-16
 Image move ............................................................................................. 6-16
 Saving the linear images.......................................................................... 6-21
6.3 Sharing Study Information between Consoles (Shared Study Information
Function) .................................................................................................................. 6-24
 Single-point output ................................................................................... 6-24
 Multi-point output ..................................................................................... 6-25
Chapter 7 Connected Devices Status 7-1
7.1 Connected Devices Status ......................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.1 Connected Devices Status............................................................................. 7-1
 Exposure Unit Communication Indicator.................................................... 7-3
 Exposure Unit Battery Indicator ................................................................. 7-4
 Grid Indicator ............................................................................................. 7-4
 Console Event Indicator ............................................................................. 7-4
 Console Battery Indicator........................................................................... 7-4
 Console Wireless Communication Indicator .............................................. 7-4
 Order Issuance Device Indicator................................................................ 7-5
 XCON Indicator .......................................................................................... 7-5
 Output Status Indicator .............................................................................. 7-5
 Wireless communication status indicator ................................................... 7-5
 Starting the General RIS Browser Software .............................................. 7-5
viii 897N203543D
300CL_Reference.book Page ix Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
7.2 Detailed Information Display Window......................................................................... 7-6

7.2.1 Event List window .......................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Image Reader Status window ........................................................................ 7-7
7.2.3 Ordering Device Setup window...................................................................... 7-9
 If the DICOM Modality Worklist Management Software and DICOM
Modality Performed Procedure Step Software are installed ...................... 7-9
 If the FUJIFILM standard ordering optional software is installed ............. 7-10
7.2.4 Output Status window .................................................................................. 7-10
 Confirm status of output device ............................................................... 7-12
7.2.5 Wireless Connection Status window ............................................................ 7-13
 Switching networks .................................................................................. 7-13
 Restoring the network connection............................................................ 7-13
Chapter 8 Functions when Using the Mobile PC 8-1
8.1 Functions when using the mobile PC ......................................................................... 8-1
Contents
8.1.1 General purpose launcher.............................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 PPS cache server function............................................................................. 8-1
8.1.3 Read order information from USB memory.................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 Remaining battery level.................................................................................. 8-3
8.1.5 Displaying software keyboard ........................................................................ 8-3
Chapter 9 User Utility Operations 9-1
9.1 Before Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1.1 The User Utility Functions .............................................................................. 9-1
 Menu Setting (“9.2 Menu Setting”) ......................................................... 9-1
 Table Setting ( “9.3 Table Setting”) ........................................................ 9-1
 Property Setting ( “9.4 Property Setting”)............................................... 9-1
 Parameter Batch Updating ( “9.5 Parameter Batch Updating”).............. 9-2
 Backup and Restoration ( “9.6 Backup and Restoration”)...................... 9-2
 Patient Information DB Utility ( “9.7 Patient Information DB Utility”) ...... 9-2
 Memory Exposure Mode ( “4.3 Memory Exposure Mode”) .................... 9-2
 Exposure Result Log ( “9.8 Exposure Result Log”)................................ 9-2
 Customizing the Screen Display ( “9.9 Customizing the Screen
Display”) ..................................................................................................... 9-2
 Calculating the Use Frequency ( “9.10 Calculating the Use
Frequency”)................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.2 Starting and Terminating the User Utility ....................................................... 9-4
 Starting the User Utility .............................................................................. 9-4
 Terminating the User Utility........................................................................ 9-7
9.2 Menu Setting .............................................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.1 Menu Setting .................................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.1.1 Exposure Menu Setting........................................................................ 9-10
 Creating Exposure Menus ....................................................................... 9-10
 Exposure Parameter Setting .................................................................... 9-13
 Editing Exposure Menus .......................................................................... 9-33
 Deleting Exposure Menus ........................................................................ 9-34
9.2.1.2 Exposure Menu Setting (for JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0)).............. 9-35
897N203543D ix
300CL_Reference.book Page x Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
Contents
 Creating Exposure Menus ....................................................................... 9-35

 Editing Exposure Menus .......................................................................... 9-38
 Deleting Exposure Menus ........................................................................ 9-39
9.2.1.3 Study Menu Setting.............................................................................. 9-40
 Creating Study Menus ............................................................................. 9-41
 Study Menu Setting.................................................................................. 9-43
 Editing Study Menus ................................................................................ 9-48
 Deleting Study Menus .............................................................................. 9-50
9.2.1.4 Display Group Setting .......................................................................... 9-50
 Relocating Display Groups ...................................................................... 9-50
 Renaming Display Groups ....................................................................... 9-51
 Deleting Display Groups .......................................................................... 9-52
 Non-Display Setting of Display Groups.................................................... 9-53
9.2.1.5 Display Menu Setting ........................................................................... 9-54
 Registering Display Menus ...................................................................... 9-54
 Relocating Display Menus ....................................................................... 9-55
 Deleting Display Menus ........................................................................... 9-56
9.2.1.6 Quick Start Mode Setting ..................................................................... 9-57
9.2.2 Collective Menu Setting ............................................................................... 9-58
 Operations which relate to the item list .................................................... 9-61
 Operations which relate to the list ............................................................ 9-61
 Operations which relate to the selected exposure menu ......................... 9-61
 Operations which relate to the collective menu setting ............................ 9-61
9.2.2.1 List Operations..................................................................................... 9-62
 About the searching operations ............................................................... 9-62
 About the sorting operations .................................................................... 9-63
9.2.2.2 Collective Setting ................................................................................. 9-64
 Operations for when setting the character strings or numerical values ... 9-64
 Operations for when options are displayed.............................................. 9-65
 Operations for when there are multiple input items ................................. 9-65
9.2.2.3 Individual Setting.................................................................................. 9-66
9.2.2.4 Duplicating the Exposure Menu ........................................................... 9-66
9.2.2.5 Deleting the Exposure Menu................................................................ 9-67
9.2.2.6 Backup and Restoration....................................................................... 9-67
9.2.2.7 Customizing the Displays..................................................................... 9-68
9.3 Table Setting ............................................................................................................ 9-69
9.3.1 Technologist Information Setting.................................................................. 9-70
 Registering Technologist Information ...................................................... 9-71
 Editing Technologist Information.............................................................. 9-72
 Relocating Technologist Information........................................................ 9-74
 Deleting Technologist Information ........................................................... 9-75
9.3.2 Requesting Department Information Setting ................................................ 9-75
 Registering Requesting Department Information ..................................... 9-76
 Editing Requesting Department Information ............................................ 9-77
 Relocating Requesting Department Information ...................................... 9-78
 Deleting Requesting Department Information .......................................... 9-78
x 897N203543D
300CL_Reference.book Page xi Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
9.3.3 Film Mark Setting ......................................................................................... 9-79

 Registering and Editing Film Marks ......................................................... 9-80
 Relocating a Film Mark ............................................................................ 9-81
 Deleting a Film Mark ................................................................................ 9-82
9.3.4 User Group Management............................................................................. 9-83
9.3.5 Mis-exposure Comment Setting................................................................... 9-84
 Registering the Mis-exposure Classification ............................................ 9-85
 Editing the Mis-exposure Classification ................................................... 9-85
 Relocating the Mis-exposure Classification ............................................. 9-86
 Deleting a Mis-Exposure Classification.................................................... 9-87
 Registering Preset Comments ................................................................. 9-87
 Editing Preset Comments ........................................................................ 9-88
 Relocating Preset Comments .................................................................. 9-88
 Deleting Preset Comments ...................................................................... 9-89
9.3.6 Anatomic Region Setting.............................................................................. 9-89
Contents
 Registering the Anatomic Region ............................................................ 9-90
 Editing Anatomic Region Information....................................................... 9-91
 Deleting Anatomic Region Information .................................................... 9-91
9.3.7 View Code Setting........................................................................................ 9-92
 Registering the View Code ...................................................................... 9-93
 Editing View Code Information................................................................. 9-93
 Deleting View Code Information .............................................................. 9-94
9.3.8 View Modifier Code Setting.......................................................................... 9-95
 Registering the View Modifier Code......................................................... 9-96
 Editing View Modifier Code information ................................................... 9-96
 Deleting View Modifier Code Information................................................. 9-97
9.3.9 Text Maker Preset Setting............................................................................ 9-98
 Registering a Text Marker........................................................................ 9-99
 Editing a Text Marker ............................................................................... 9-99
 Deleting a Text Marker........................................................................... 9-100
 Registering a DICOM Text Marker......................................................... 9-100
 Editing a DICOM Text Marker ................................................................ 9-101
9.4 Property Setting...................................................................................................... 9-104
 Setup during a study 1 ........................................................................... 9-105
 Setup during a study 2 ........................................................................... 9-109
 Image Distribution Setting 1 ................................................................... 9-118
 Image Distribution Setting 2 ................................................................... 9-121
 Other setting .......................................................................................... 9-123
 Other settings 2...................................................................................... 9-124
 Performance Setting .............................................................................. 9-126
 Selector setting ...................................................................................... 9-127
9.5 Parameter Batch Updating ..................................................................................... 9-128
9.6 Backup and Restoration ......................................................................................... 9-130
9.6.1 Backup ....................................................................................................... 9-130
9.6.2 Restoration................................................................................................. 9-132
897N203543D xi
300CL_Reference.book Page xii Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
Contents
9.7 Patient Information DB Utility ................................................................................. 9-134

9.7.1 Patient Information Maintenance ............................................................... 9-134
 Registering Patient Information.............................................................. 9-135
 Editing Patient Information ..................................................................... 9-136
 Deleting Patient Information................................................................... 9-138
 Customizing the Patient Information List ............................................... 9-138
9.7.2 Import of Patient Information...................................................................... 9-140
 Method of Patient Information Import..................................................... 9-140
 Methods to create the patient information file for import ........................ 9-142
9.7.3 Export of Patient Information...................................................................... 9-145
9.8 Exposure Result Log .............................................................................................. 9-147
9.8.1 Saving Logs ............................................................................................... 9-147
9.8.2 Clearing Logs ............................................................................................. 9-151
9.9 Customizing the Screen Display ............................................................................ 9-152
9.9.1 QA Function Shortcut................................................................................. 9-153
 Registering QA Function Buttons........................................................... 9-154
 Relocating QA Function Shortcut Buttons ............................................. 9-156
 Deleting QA Function Shortcut Buttons ................................................. 9-157
9.9.2 Customizing the Study List Controller ........................................................ 9-158
 Registering a Study List Control Button ................................................. 9-159
 Relocating a Study List Control Button .................................................. 9-159
 Deleting a study list control button ......................................................... 9-160
9.9.3 Customizing the QA Function Buttons ....................................................... 9-160
 Registering a QA Function Button ......................................................... 9-162
 Relocating QA Function Buttons ............................................................ 9-163
 Deleting QA Function Buttons................................................................ 9-163
9.9.4 Customizing the QA Controller Buttons ..................................................... 9-164
 Registering QA Image Controller Buttons .............................................. 9-165
 Relocating QA Image Controller Buttons ............................................... 9-165
 Deleting QA Image Controller Buttons ................................................... 9-166
9.9.5 Image area operation ................................................................................. 9-167
 Registering the Button in the Image area operation .............................. 9-168
 Relocating the Buttons in the Image area operation .............................. 9-169
 Deleting the Buttons in the Image area operation.................................. 9-169
9.9.6 Image Display Setting ................................................................................ 9-170
9.9.7 Exposure Parameter Shortcut.................................................................... 9-172
 Registering Exposure Parameter Shortcut Buttons ............................... 9-173
 Relocating Exposure Parameter Shortcut Buttons ................................ 9-174
 Deleting Exposure Parameter Shortcut Buttons .................................... 9-175
9.9.8 Customizing the Connected Devices Status .............................................. 9-176
 Registering device information to be displayed ..................................... 9-177
 Changing the display position of device information .............................. 9-179
 Deleting device information.................................................................... 9-179
9.10 Calculating the Use Frequency .............................................................................. 9-180
9.10.1 Narrow-down Searching............................................................................. 9-180
9.10.2 Outputting the List Files ............................................................................. 9-181
9.10.3 Resetting the Use Count ............................................................................ 9-181
xii 897N203543D
300CL_Reference.book Page 1 Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM
Introduction
This Reference Guide applies to the following software.

 DR-ID 300CL Application Software V16.1
This Reference Guide carefully explains the operation methods and cautions for each screen so
that you can understand and more effectively use the functions of Console Advance.
CAUTION
Introduction
 Unauthorized transfer or duplication of all or any part of the content of this manual is strictly
prohibited.
 The contents of this Operation Manual are subject to change without prior notice.
 FUJIFILM Corporation accepts no liability whatsoever with regard to faults or damage
arising from installation, relocation, modifications, maintenance or repairs performed by
anyone other than FUJIFILM Corporation or a contractor approved by FUJIFILM
Corporation.
 FUJIFILM Corporation accepts no liability whatsoever with regard to faults of or damage to
this product caused by third-party products other than those supplied by FUJIFILM
Corporation.
arising from modifications, maintenance or repairs in which replacement parts other than
the genuine parts approved by FUJIFILM Corporation were used.
arising as a result of a failure to observe the safety precautions and operational procedures
provided in this Operation Manual.
caused by ambient conditions that deviate from the operating conditions for this product,
such as the power supply and installation environment, that are specified in this Operation
Manual.
caused by natural events such as fires, earthquakes, floods or lightning strikes.
Regulation (EU) 2017/745 requires that any serious incident that has occurred in relation to the
device should be reported to the manufacturer or European Authorized Representative, and the
competent authority of your country. In case you become aware of any serious incident, please
report immediately to our official dealer and the competent authority of your country.
This equipment has been designed on the assumption that the patient would not come into direct
contact with it or for operation by appropriately trained operator.
Process waste correctly, as stipulated by local law or any regulations that apply.
897N203543D 1
Introduction
When discarding the Console that incorporates the lithium battery, be sure to contact a licensed
waste disposal contractor because it cannot be disposed of as a general waste.
Caution: Rx Only (Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.)
For the Console Advance Lite, the following functions are optional.
 Detailed QA Software
 Image Magnification Software
 Annotation Input Software
 X-ray Control Unit Online Software
 DR Exposure Unit Connection Software
Screens shown in this Reference Guide may be different from actual screens.
 (Exposure parameter selection button) and exposure parameter shortcut buttons (the
number and shape of buttons displayed)
 Connected devices status
There are two types of the Console screens: square monitor and wide monitor. Either of the
screens can be used depending on the computer in use and settings at installation.
The square monitor can be used regardless of screen resolution, while the wide monitor can be
used only when the resolution is for the wide monitor.
This Reference Guide describes both screens and the operational procedures only when the
procedures are different from one another. When the procedures are the same, only the
procedure for the square monitor is written. Thus, the wide monitor users should refer to the
operational description for the square monitor.
Trademark
FDR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Other holders’ trademarks
Windows 7 is the registered trademark of US Microsoft Corporation in the U. S. A. and other
countries.
Windows 10 is the registered trademark of US Microsoft Corporation in the U. S. A. and other
countries.
Windows is the registered trademark of US Microsoft Corporation in the U. S. A. and other
countries.
All other company names and product names described in this manual are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Copyright © 2021-2023 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
2 897N203543D

"! "$
# $ $'"# '"$"%"# $$%! $##!$

$$"#!" &"(%# $ $'"($####%!$
#" %$ $## $'" $'""$'"$$$"# %$$ $" $'"
#%(%!$#%!"# &"# #$ # !# $ $'"#$ ( %(
"! "$
# 6$,'%5515*'5'3/4#0&%10&+5+1041(5*+4 )3''/'05:16#3')3#05'&#.+/+5'&010'9%.64+7'01053#04('3#$.'

#0&01046$.+%'04#$.'.+%'04'5164'5*'1(58#3'#0&5*' 1%6/'05#5+1010.:10#4+0).'%1/265'3605+.46%*3+)*54#3'
5'3/+0#5'&#%%13&+0)51'%5+10$'.18
&"#! 5+4#%-018.'&)'&#0&#)3''&5*#53'5#+04#..5+5.'#0&3+)*54515*'1(58#3'5*' 1%6/'05#5+10#0&#..

%12+'45*'3'1(#0&015+5.'133+)*54515*'1(58#3'135*' 1%6/'05#5+10+453#04('33'&13.+%'04'&51:16'9%'25#4'923'44.:4'5
(135**'3'+0
#$"$ # "16/#:+/#-'#0&3'5#+010''953#%12:1(5*'1(58#3'(13$#%-62263214'410.: #0&++%12:5*'
Introduction
1%6/'05#5+1010.:#43'#410#$.:0'%'44#3:(1364'33'('3'0%'#0&$#%-62263214'4#%*%12:1(5*'1(58#3'#0&
1%6/'05#5+10/#&'$::164*#..%105#+05*'4#/'23123+'5#3:015+%'4.#$'.4#0&/#3-4#45*'13+)+0#.5*'3'1(8+5*165#0:
#.5'3#5+10"164*#..015+4'..46$.+%'04'#44+)0.'#4''0%6/$'31315*'38+4'53#04('35*'1(58#3'135*' 1%6/'05#5+1013
5*'3+)*54)3#05'&*'3'60&'3 ++3'7'34''0)+0''3&'%1/2+.'&+4#44'/$.'13%3'#5'&'3+7#5+7'813-41(5*'1(58#3' +++3'/17'
13#.5'3#0:23123+'5#3:015+%'4.#$'.413/#3-41013%105#+0'&+0#0:2#351(5*'1(58#3'135*' 1%6/'05#5+10 +7/#-'#0:
%12+'41(5*'1(58#3'135*' 1%6/'05#5+10'9%'25#42'3/+55'&#$17' 137+045#..5*'1(58#3'10#0:%1/265'315*'35*#0#4
2'3/+55'&$:5*+4 )3''/'05 4#%10&+5+101(5*'64'1(5*'1(58#3'$::16:16*'3'$:3'23'4'05#0&8#33#055*#5:164*#..015
64'5*'1(58#3'(13#0:263214'5*#5+460.#8(6.13231*+$+5'&$:5*+4 )3''/'05"16#)3''51#$+&'$:#..#22.+%#$.'.#84#0&
3')6.#5+104+0:16364'1(5*'1(58#3'
'! "$ $" "164*#..%1/2.:8+5*#..'92135#0&3''921353'453+%5+104#0&3')6.#5+104+/214'&$:5*')17'30/'051(5*'

0+5'&5#5'4#0&15*'33'.'7#05%16053+'4133')+104=92135'453+%5+104>"164*#..015-018+0).:53#04('3&+3'%5.:13+0&+3'%5.:
#0:3'453+%5'&41(58#3'135'%*0+%#.&#5#3'%'+7'&*'3'60&'3135*'&+3'%5231&6%51(46%*&#5#51#0:%16053:133')+10+&'05+(+'&
#4#0'/$#3)1'&&'45+0#5+1013%16053:+05*'92135'453+%5+10460.'4423+1383+55'0#65*13+;#5+10+41$5#+0'&(31/#0&
'#%*#223123+#5'0+5'&5#5'41315*'3)17'30/'05#)'0%+'4*+4'%5+104*#..4637+7'5*''92+3#5+10135'3/+0#5+101(5*+4
.+%'04'#)3''/'05
!$!" /#:#5+5441.'&+4%3'5+10/#-'#0:62&#5'1362)3#&'1(5*'1(58#3'#7#+.#$.' *18'7'3

4*#..*#7'011$.+)#5+10451/#-'#0:62&#5'1362)3#&'1(5*'1(58#3'#7#+.#$.'
$""$( *'3'$:8#33#0545*#55*'1(58#3'4*#..12'3#5'+046$45#05+#.%10(13/+5:8+5*5*'5*'0%633'05
1%6/'05#5+108*'064'&+0453+%5%1/2.+#0%'8+5*46%* 1%6/'05#5+10*+48#33#05:4*#..$''(('%5+7'10.:(1310':'#3
(1..18+0):1633'%'+251(5*'1(58#3'*'3'+0#(5'33'('33'&51#4= #33#05:'3+1&>*+48#33#05:+4%10&+5+10'&62105*'
+045#..#5+10#0&64'1(5*'.#5'457'34+101(5*'1(58#3'3'.'#4'&$:+0453+%5%1/2.+#0%'8+5*5*'5*'0%633'05 1%6/'05#5+10
(5*'1(58#3'(#+.4512'3(13/#48#33#05'&+05*' #33#05:'3+1&4*#..64'%1//'3%+#..:3'#410#$.''((135451%133'%546%*
1(58#3' ! " <
" " "
!
"
$$ $( ! "
" ! " "

" " " "
"
"
"" %# # *+4 )3''/'054*#..$')17'30'&$:#0&%104536'&#%%13&+0)515*'.#841(#2#0'9%.6&+0)+54

%10(.+%51(.#8436.'4"16%104'05515*''9%.64+7',63+4&+%5+101(#2#0'4'%16354#0&#)3''5*#55*'7'06'4*#...+''9%.64+7'.:+0
#2#0+0#..&+4265'4#3+4+0)1651(133'.#5+0)515*+4 )3''/'05*'64'1(5*'1(58#3'13 1%6/'05#5+10+4015#65*13+;'&+0
#0:,63+4&+%5+105*#5&1'4015)+7''(('%551#..2317+4+1041(5*'5'3/4#0&%10&+5+1041(5*+4 )3''/'05+0%.6&+0)8+5*165.+/+5#5+10
5*+4'%5+10
"$ ..5*'3+)*54)3#05'&51:16*'3'60&'34*#..#651/#5+%#..:5'3/+0#5'6210:163$3'#%*1(#0:2317+4+10*'3'+0
#0&:16/645%'#4'5*'64'1(5*'1(58#3'#0& 1%6/'05#5+10#0&&'4536%5#..%12+'41(5*'1(58#3'#0& 1%6/'05#5+10+0
:1632144'44+10+0%.6&+0)#0:1($#%-62%12:621046%*5'3/+0#5+10 0:2317+4+10*'3'+05*#5$:+540#563'4637+7'44*#..4637+7'
5*'5'3/+0#5+101(5*'3+)*54)3#05'&51:16*'3'60&'3
897N203543D 3
Introduction
4 897N203543D
Chapter
1 Operation Flow
1.1 Operation Screen

This section explains the operation screen for the basic operations ranging from reception to
completion of a study. For more details regarding such actions as starting up and shutting down
the Console, see “Console Advance Operation Manual”. (About the various lists, see “Chapter 6
List Operation”.)
1.1.1 Receiving Studies

(1) Inputting Patient Information
 “2.1.2 Inputting Patient Information”
To input the patient information from the patient’s

information DB, select this.
“Patient Information Input screen”
“Patient Information Selection box”
897N203543D 1-1
(2) Selecting Exposure Menu

 “3.1.1 Exposure Menu Selection Screen”
To modify the patient information, select

this.
“Exposure Menu Selection screen” After selecting exposure

“Patient Information Input box”
menu, select this to display
the “Study screen”.
Proceed to “1.1.2 Confirming Study Details” on the next page.
1-2 897N203543D
1.1.2 Confirming Study Details
“Patient Information Input box” “Exposure Menu Addition box”
To add exposure menus, select this.

To modify the patient information,
select this.
To change exposure menus, select this.

“Study screen”
“Exposure Menu Change box”
Note
 Selecting displays a confirmation dialog box for patient information correction. Read
the displayed message, and then select . The “Patient Information Input box” is
displayed. Whether the confirmation dialog box is displayed or not depends on the setting
at the time of installation.
Proceed to “1.1.3 Executing Studies”.
897N203543D 1-3
1.1.3 Executing Studies
(1) Starting a Study

 “4.1.2 Starting a Study”
To execute a reserved study, select the study from the list.
To confirm or modify exposure

parameters before image reading,
select this.
“Study screen”
(before image reading)
“Exposure Parameter Selection box”
(2) Reading Images

 “4.2 Reading Images”
The transmitted from the exposure unit is read on the “Study screen”.
To finish the study, select this.
“Study screen” To edit the image (QA), select this.

(after image reading)
Proceed to “1.1.4 Editing Images (QA)” on the next page.
1-4 897N203543D
1.1.4 Editing Images (QA)
To edit the image (QA) read on the “Study screen”, select the QA button
on the screen.
“Study screen”
“Image Edit screen” To finish image edit (QA), select this.

(image editing during a study)
To edit the image (QA) of the study on the “Waiting QA list” after reading,
select such a study from the list.
“Waiting QA list”
“Image Edit screen”

To finish image edit (QA), select this.
(image editing after a study)
897N203543D 1-5
1.2 Common Indications and Functions on the Operation

Screens
1.2.1 Common Indications
This section explains the buttons and the areas that are commonly displayed on the operation
screens.
The “Patient Information Input screen” is used in an example below.
(1)
(3)
(2) (4)
(1) Tool button ( )
Selecting will display a menu that is associated with the Console system.
The displayed menu will differ depending on the settings performed at time of installation and the
display screen.
1-6 897N203543D
Displayed menus

Major menu items displayed are explained below.
[Cancel]:
Cancels the menu display.
[Version Display]:
Displays the “Version Information Confirmation box”.
 “2.3 Version Display”
[Media list]:
Displays the [Media list].
 “Console Advance Reference Guide (Option)”
[Cancel editing images]:
Clears the editing limitations for image processing.
[Switch the user]:
Changes the technologist (user) logged in to the Console.
[Logout]:
Logs out the technologist (user) who is logged in the Console.
 “Console Advance Operation Manual”
[Password change]:
Changes the password that you need to log in.
[User Utility]:
Before starting User Utility mode, the Console should be shut down.
 “Chapter 9 User Utility Operations”
[Shut Down]:
Ends the system operation and shuts off the power to the Console.
897N203543D 1-7
(2) Logged-in user display area

Displays the name of the user currently logged in.
(3) Connected devices status

Used to confirm the status of connected devices.
The icons in the connected devices status vary, depending on the setting at the time of
installation and the display screen.
 “Chapter 7 Connected Devices Status”
(4) Display of the current time and date

The current time and date are displayed. Confirm that they are correct.
Note
 If the time and date are not correct, use the User Utility to change them.
 “9.4 Property Setting”
1.2.2 Common Functions
 Changing login technologist (user) by reading the technologist barcode

While the following screens are displayed, reading the technologist barcode can change the
login technologist (user). To use this function, settings at the time of installation are necessary.
 Patient Information Input screen
 Exposure Menu Selection screen
 Study List screen (except F-RIS screen)
Depending on the settings at the time of installation, the “Login box” is displayed; enter a
password to log in.
If you failed to login with a certain user name thrice or more times continuously in an hour, the
login with the user name is locked according to the setting at the time of installation. In that case,
log in with another user name belonging to the user group of the administrator and then unlock
the locked user name with the User Utility.
 “9.3.1 Technologist Information Setting”
 Changing login technologist (user) by reading the smart card

While the following screens are displayed, reading the smart card can change the login
technologist (user). To use this function, settings at the time of installation are necessary.
 Patient Information Input screen
 Exposure Menu Selection screen
 Study List screen (except F-RIS screen)
Depending on the settings at the time of installation, the “Login box” is displayed; enter a
password to log in.
If you failed to login with a certain user name thrice or more times continuously in an hour, the
login with the user name is locked according to the setting at the time of installation. In that case,
log in with another user name belonging to the user group of the administrator and then unlock
the locked user name with the User Utility.
1-8 897N203543D
 Automatic shutdown
When the User Utility - “Property Setting” - “Auto shutdown timer” is other than “0” and a state
with no operation done lasted for the time, the system is automatically shut down about one
minute after the following dialog appeared. Selecting in the dialog cancels the shutdown.

Executing the automatic shutdown is the following requirements.
Screens for executing the automatic shutdown
 Patient Information Input screen *1

*1
 Study List screen (normal query, work list, and F-RIS)
 Login box
*1 While the following functions are active, no shutdown works.
 Image move
 Patient ID automatic conversion software
 PDI writing software
 Free Layout Print Software
 Media Storage Software
 Get Image in the Memory Exposure Mode
 Image Reading in the background
Console operations out of the coverage of the shutdown

 Entry via keyboard, mouth operation, screen tapping
 Reading magnetic cards and barcodes (IP barcode and clinical record ID)
 Starting a study with the MWM trigger (except receiving a trigger), starting a study according
to the MWM Auto setting
 Automatic execution for a study upon reception of order information by the simple ordering
function
 Operation of the smart controller
 Connection to the remote desktop via a mobile terminal device
 Reading a smart card
897N203543D 1-9
1-10 897N203543D
Chapter
2 Study Reception
2.1 Study Reception

2.1.1 Patient Information Input Screen
This is a screen for receiving studies. On this screen, the patient information can be input. By
selecting the list tabs at the top of the screen, various lists can be displayed.
 “Chapter 6 List Operation”
The default gender and requesting department on the “Patient Information Input screen” can be
set in the User Utility.

Explained herein is how to operate the screen keyboard and other input fields on the “Patient
Information Input screen”.
(2)
(3) (1)
897N203543D 2-1
(1) Screen keyboard

This keyboard is used to input information in the patient information input field.
: Deletes one character to the left of the cursor.
Space Bar: Enters one blank space.
/ : Moves the caret “ | ” to make space for one character to the left/right.
: Alternately switches upper- and lower-case letters of the alphabet.
(2) Patient information input field and buttons on the right side
Used to input patient information.
[Patient's Name]:
Input patient’s name (a maximum of 64 characters).
[Sex]:
Select the sex of the patient (male, female, or other). You can use the User
Utility to specify which of the selections for sex is to be determined as the
default.
[Birth Date]:
Input patient’s date of birth. The input format for the date is shown in the
example below the input field.
[Outpatient/inpatient]:
Input whether outpatient or inpatient (Outpatient, Inpatient).
[Patient ID]:
Input patient’s ID number. (A maximum number of digits vary depending on the
setting performed at time of installation.)
[Accession No.].:
Input the an accession number. (A maximum number of digits vary depending
on the setting performed at time of installation.)
[Requesting Department]:
Select the requesting department name.
[Contrast Allergies]:
Input information on contraindication (a maximum of 64 characters).
[Patient comments]:
Input comments on patient (a maximum of 1024 characters).
[Study comments]:
Input comments on study (a maximum of 1024 characters).
[With or without an implant]:
Select (none), (left breast), (right breast) or (both

right and left) for breast implant information.
Note that the setting must be done at the time of installation in order to input
breast implant information.
2-2 897N203543D
Registers the patient information and the Exposure menu automatically

: according to preset information.
If the number of registered Study menu/Exposure menu is one, the Study
screen directly appears.
If two or more, the Study screen appears through the Menu selection screen.
Clears patient information (except “Technologist”) input in the “Patient
:
Information Input screen”, and then returns to the top page of the patient
information input field.
Retrieves necessary patient information from the patient information database
:
registered to the Console main unit so that it is displayed on the “Patient
Information Input screen”. (This is denominated the patient information
database function.)
Reserves a study based on the information input in the “Patient Information
:
Input screen”. A study thus reserved is displayed in the “Waiting Study list”.
Terminates patient information input, and then displays the “Exposure Menu
:
Selection screen”.
(3) Back to list

: Returns to the “Study List screen”.
Note
 Follow either one of the procedures below to correct the patient information/study No.
tethered to a study done by the Quick Start button.
- Use the QA function to correct.
- Use the image move function to move a study done by the Quick Start button to the
original study (a study in which correct patient information such as an order from the RIS
has been registered). After the study is moved, replace images with the study/QA, and
delete an unnecessary menu.
 The following is the condition of the image before the movement and the study statuses of
the destination.
You may need to change a study status done by the Quick Start button to other statuses.
[Destination study] = Original study

Await
New study Await QA Outputting Output
studying
Await
[Image before Movable Movable Not movable Not movable Not movable
studying
movement] =
Await QA Movable Not movable Movable Not movable Not movable
Quick Start
Outputting Not movable Not movable Not movable Not movable Not movable
study image
Output Movable Movable Movable Not movable Movable
897N203543D 2-3
2.1.2 Inputting Patient Information

Patient information can be input in the “Patient Information Input screen”.
It is not necessary to enter all the items on this screen. We recommend, however, that you enter
the Patient Name and Patient ID.
You can search for previously registered patient information using the patient ID as the keyword,
call it from the database, and display it in the “Patient Information Input screen”.
 Inputting patient information in the Patient Information Input screen

Input data to each item in the “Patient information input field”.
After you have entered text in a field, select the next field you want to enter, or press the [Tab]
key. This will move the text-entry caret “|”.
As patient information can also be input on the “Exposure Menu Selection screen” or “Study
screen” later, you can proceed the operation without inputting any patient information at this step.
To correct wrong input

Described below is how to correct characters input in the entry fields on the “Patient Information
Input screen”.
When a keyboard is used :

When the keyboard of the personal computer is used, use the [Back Space] key to erase the
input character immediately before the caret and modify it.
Press the [Back Space] key to delete the character immediately before the caret “ | ”, then enter
the correct character.
The caret “ | ” can be moved using the arrow keys ( / ) to the character you want
to correct.
When a screen keyboard is used :

Use the arrow keys ( / ) to move the caret “ | ” immediately after the character you
want to correct, and select . The character immediately before the caret “ | ” will be
erased. Make then necessary corrections accordingly.
2-4 897N203543D
Operation of the input items for which selection buttons are displayed
When the caret “ | ” for character input is moved to the Sex, Requesting department, Outpatient/
Inpatient input field, or Implant, a setting tab appears at the lower left of the screen keyboard. For
example, when the caret “ | ” is at the Sex input box, the “Sex tab” is displayed as shown below.
Indicate any of them, and select .
Then, the “Sex tab” is closed to complete the input.
Specify one of them, and complete the input.

To cancel the operation, select .
 Ending input of patient information to display the Exposure Menu Selection screen
After completing input of patient information, select .

The patient information input is then finished to proceed to the “Exposure Menu Selection
screen”.
When is selected, a received study can be reserved as an unexecuted study. The

reserved study is stacked to the “Waiting Study list”.
897N203543D 2-5
2.1.3 Patient Information Database Function

The patient information already registered in the database can be retrieved by inputting
keywords.
Also, the patient information list registered in the database can be displayed to retrieve the
patient information or to delete unnecessary information from the list.
 Input by keyword retrieval

It is possible to retrieve patient information from the database by entering the patient ID in the
“Patient Information Input screen”. Enter the desired patient ID, then press the keyboard’s Enter
key or to display the patient data in the “Patient Information Input screen”.
 Input by list retrieval

The list of patient information registered in the database can be displayed on the “Patient
Information Selection box” to select the necessary patient information.
The selected patient information is entered in the “Patient Information Input screen”.
Select with the caret (“|”) for character input in the patient ID.
2-6 897N203543D
The “Patient Information Selection box” will be displayed.

Select the group folder tab, select the patient information, and then select .
The patient information will be displayed on the “Patient Information Input screen”.

To scroll patient information, select / .
897N203543D 2-7
 Deletion
Unnecessary patient information can be deleted from the database.
Unnecessary patient information can be deleted by displaying the list of patient information
registered in the database on the “Patient Information Selection box”.
Select with nothing entered in the patient information input field of the “Patient Information
Input screen”.
The “Patient Information Selection box” will be displayed.
Display the patient information to be deleted in the “Patient Information Selection box” by
performing operations of “Input by keyword retrieval” or “Input by list retrieval”, select the patient
information, and then select .
The patient information will be deleted accordingly.
2-8 897N203543D
2.2 Study Information List

Detailed study information can be viewed in the “Study Information box”.
The “Study Information box” can be displayed from the “Study screen”, and “Image Edit screen”.
 Display from the “Study screen” and “Image Edit screen”
Display a study targeted for processing and then select .
The “Study Information box” is displayed.

Information items can be customized as needed. When customizing study information, you can
specify whether or not to display specific information items or change order of the item display.
After you have viewed study information or customized information items, select .
“Study Information box”
897N203543D 2-9
To customize information items, select .

The “Customization box” is displayed.
Customize information items as needed and then select .
“Customization box”
 Primary items
 Add or delete information items
Select the desired item from the list, then select (add) or (delete).
Select / to display the previous or next page.

 Setting the text size and other aspects of information items
To change the text color of information items, select the for font color. The “Color
Settings” window appears.
Select a color, and then click [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the color setting.
To change the height of an information row, select a height (1, 2, or 3) from the [Rows] drop-
down list.
To change the text size of an information item, select a size (8/9/10/11/12/14/16/18/20/22/24/
26/28/36/48) from the [Font Size] drop-down list.
To change the font style of an information item, select a format (Bold or Normal) from the
[Font Style] drop-down list.
2-10 897N203543D
 General items
 Display/Non-display
After selecting a target item from the list, select (display)/ (non-display). Checked
items will be displayed, and unchecked items will not be displayed.
You can also check or uncheck a study information item by directly selecting checkbox of the
target item. Specify whether or not to display a study information item and then select .
Note
 The item selected here is not linked to the items in the result information overlay display.
 See “Chapter 9 User Utility Operations” for details on how to edit the result
information overlay display.
 Display order change
After selecting a target item from the list, select (moves upward) / (moves
downward).
Select / to display the previous or next page. To cancel the operation, select
.
897N203543D 2-11
2.3 Version Display

The “Version Information Confirmation box” can be displayed. In this box, you can confirm
version and UDI of the Console application software and installed optional software items.
Select , then from the menu that appears, select [Version Display] to display the “Version
Information Confirmation box”.
“Version Information Confirmation box”
1 Version and UDI of the application software

2 Options installed
Check the contents, and then select to close the box.

Select to display the authentication dialog box.
Note
 If there is no authentication information, the authentication dialog box will be displayed
blank.
2-12 897N203543D
Chapter
3 Exposure Menu
Registration
3.1 Exposure Menu Registration

This section describes how to register an exposure menu, and edit patient information and
exposure menus.
3.1.1 Exposure Menu Selection Screen

This is a screen for receiving studies. On this screen, exposure menus can be selected.
When you have finished entering the patient information in the “Patient Information Input screen”,
the “Exposure Menu Selection screen” appears.
 “2.1.2 Inputting Patient Information” - “ Ending input of patient information to display the
Exposure Menu Selection screen”

Whether to display the “Exposure Menu Selection screen” for text or graphics depends on the
settings at the time of installation.
<For text>
1
2 3 4 5
897N203543D 3-1
1 Patient information display field

2 Display group list
3 Exposure menu list registered to the display group
4 Selected exposure menu list
5 Technologist display field
<For graphics>
1
2 3 4 5 6

2 Long-view exposure
(displayed only when the Automatic Image Stitching Software is installed)
3 Body part
4 Exposure menu list for each body part
5 Selected exposure menu list
3-2 897N203543D
Patient information display field:

Displays patient information.
When the birth date has been input as patient’s information, the
patient’s age at the time of image reading is displayed.
When you made any other setting than (none) for [With or without an
implant] on the “Patient Information Input screen”, (left breast),
(right breast) or (both right and left) is shown
accordingly.
Technologist display field:
Displays the name of logged-in technologist (user).
Whether a technologist name is displayed or not in the “Technologist
display field” depends on the setting performed at time of installation.
Display group list:
Selects a display group.
Exposure and study menus registered to the display group selected
here will be shown in the “Exposure menu list registered to the display
group”. Menus registered to the “Display group list” can be edited as
necessary using the User Utility.
 “9.2 Menu Setting”

Exposure menu list registered to the display group:
Displays exposure and study menus registered to the display group
selected in the “Display group list”. Exposure menus for the menus
selected from this list will be displayed in the “Selected Exposure
Menu list”. An exposure menu must also be selected for general
exposure.
Selected exposure menu list:
Displays exposure and study menus selected in the “Exposure menu
list registered to the display group”.
Moving up and down any exposure menu item in the “Selected
Exposure Menu list” changes the display order.
Up to 48 exposure menus can be registered per study.
: Displays the page number of the “Exposure menu list registered to the
display group”. turns one page backward, and turns one page
forward.
: Displays the “Patient Information Input box” or the menu to modify the
patient information.
/ : Scrolls the “Selected Exposure Menu list”.
Deletes an exposure menu selected in the “Exposure menu list

:
registered to the display group”.
Deletes all exposure menus included in the “Exposure menu list
:
registered to the display group”.
897N203543D 3-3
: Cancels setup data on the “Patient Information Input screen” and the
“Exposure Menu Selection screen”, and terminates the current study.
Returns to the “Patient Information Input screen”.
: Reserves the received study without executing it. The “Patient

Information Input screen” accepts the next study continuously.
Reserved studies can be selected from the “Waiting Study list” and
executed.
 See “4.1.2 Starting a Study” - “ Starting studies from the
“Waiting Study list”” for details on how to execute a reserved study
from the “Waiting Study list”.
: Starts executing a study. When a study is started, the “Study screen” is

displayed. Prior to starting a study, make sure that the exposure menu
selection is correct.
Body part:
Displayed for graphics only. Selects the body part. Exposure or study
menus registered in the body part selected here are displayed in the
“Exposure menu list for each body part”. Menus registered in
“Exposure menu list for each body part” can be edited in the User
Utility.
Displayed for graphics only. Frequently used exposure menus can be
:
displayed in the “Exposure menu list for each body part”. Menus
registered in “Exposure menu list for each body part” can be edited in
the User Utility.
CAUTION
Precautions to observe when making an exposure with the DR exposure unit
 When exposure conditions are changed on the DR exposure unit or Console, the changed
information is valid only for the current exposure.
 When exposure conditions are changed on the DR exposure unit or Console, make sure
that the conditions are the same on both the DR exposure unit and the Console. Make an
exposure after confirmation.
 When a technique is changed, make sure that the technique is the same on both the DR
exposure unit and the Console. Also, check exposure conditions again on the DR exposure
unit and the Console, and then make an exposure.
 While performing exposure operations, including hand switch operation, and changing the
technique on the DR exposure unit, do not operate the Console. In addition, while
operating the Console, do not operate the DR exposure unit.
 When making an oblique direction exposure (when X-rays are not perpendicular to the
grid) with the DR exposure unit, note the following points in order to assure the desired
exposure of the ROI. Also, note these points to output the ROI without fail when outputting
the image exposed by the DR exposure unit to film.
 In an oblique direction exposure, the shape of the radiation field may not be rectangular.
3-4 897N203543D
CAUTION
 When outputting the image exposed by the DR exposure unit to film, the margin may be
trimmed by about 2 mm (0.08 in.).
 Image magnification ratios are different in exposures using the FPD and a cassette. Note
that making a diagnosis without regard to the difference may lead to misdiagnosis.
 There are the following differences on the images exposed by the DR exposure unit
(SID=100 cm (39.4 in.)):
 The image exposed in an upright position is displayed about 5% larger than the actual
object.
 The image exposed in a supine position is displayed about 10% larger than the actual
object.
 The Console includes a function that reduces these errors. With the use of this function,
film is output after reducing the image size based on the exposure plane size. (Whether this
processing is executed or not depends on the setting at the time of installation.) In case of
projection exposure and oblique direction exposure, magnification ratio is different in each
image area. Distance correction is performed from the center of the panel over the entire
image area, resulting in the errors above. Keep this in mind when using the correction
function.
 Exposure conditions sent from a RIS terminal cannot be reflected on those on the DR

exposure unit. If it is necessary to change exposure conditions, change them on the DR
exposure unit, and then make an exposure.
 Some exposure conditions set in the User Utility may be invalid depending on the
connected device. Check the X-ray control parameters available for the system.
 If a study is resumed after editing its exposure menus in the User Utility, the change may
not be reflected on the DR exposure unit. In such a case, select other exposure menu to
appropriately reflect the change.
897N203543D 3-5
3.1.2 Modifying Exposure Menu

Exposure menus can be added, changed, and deleted as necessary.
 Adding exposure menus

To add exposure menus on the “Exposure Menu Selection screen”, use this function with no
exposure menus selected in the “Selected Exposure Menu list”.
Note
 Make sure that no exposure menu has been selected in the “Selected Exposure Menu
list”, and then add exposure menus. An attempt to add an exposure menu, with another
exposure menu selected in the “Selected Exposure Menu list”, will result in changing the
selected exposure menu to the new one.
 Changing exposure menus

To change an exposure menu on the “Exposure Menu Selection screen”, select an exposure
menu you want to change from the “Selected Exposure Menu list” and then perform manipulation
necessary to change the selected exposure menu.
3-6 897N203543D
 Deleting exposure menus

To delete a specific exposure menu on the “Exposure Menu Selection screen”, select the menu
in the “Selected Exposure Menu list” and then, select .
To delete all the exposure menus, select .
897N203543D 3-7
3.1.3 Modifying Patient Information

The patient information in studies displayed in the “Exposure Menu Selection screen” and “Study
screen” can be modified as needed.
If patient information of a certain study is corrected when multiple studies are being started at the
same time, such a correction is reflected accordingly on patient information of other selected
studies.
When the user authentication has been specified according to the setting performed at time of
installation, the permission to use this function can be set to each user in the User Utility.
 “9.3 Table Setting”
Select in the “Exposure Menu Selection screen” or “Study screen”.

The “Patient Information Input box” is displayed.
Modify the patient information as necessary, and then select .
 “2.1.1 Patient Information Input Screen”
To input patient information using the Patient Information Database function, select .
To cancel the operation and return to the previous screen, select .
3-8 897N203543D
Chapter
4 Executing Studies
4.1 Executing Studies

Start an already-received study and perform image reading on the “Study screen”. Described
herein are operations for the execution of studies.
An exposure technique can be changed on both the connected Console and DR exposure unit.
The changed technique information is valid only for the current exposure.
4.1.1 Study Screen

This is a screen for executing a study. On this screen, various settings and image reading can
be operated.
The “Study screen” offers one-image display mode and six-image display mode.
A maximum of six images can be displayed in six-image display mode at the same time. Shown
herein are samples and explanations of image display in individual modes.
897N203543D 4-1
One-image display mode

1 2
4 6
5

2 Exposure menu list
3 Selected exposure menu number display field
4 Image display field
5 Exposure unit display field
4-2 897N203543D
Six-image display mode

1

4 5

2 Exposure unit display field
3 Selected exposure menu number display field

Displays patient information.
When the birth date has been input as patient’s information, the patient’s age at
the time of image reading is displayed.
Technologist display field:
Displays the name of logged-in technologist (user).
Whether a technologist name is displayed or not in the “Technologist display
field” depends on the setting performed at time of installation.
Image display field:
Displays the read image. When six-image display mode is selected, images are
displayed in the following order: Starting from the top left  top center  top
right  bottom left  bottom center  bottom right. Exposure result information
can also be displayed as an overlay. In addition, image display size can be
customized.
897N203543D 4-3
Exposure unit display field:

Displays the combinations of the tube, technique, and flat panel sensor. Up to
six combinations can be displayed.
Exposure menu list:
Displays the exposure menus selected on the “Exposure Menu Selection
screen”.
Moving up and down any exposure menu item in the “Exposure menu list”
changes the display order.
Exposure result display field:
Displays the exposure result as an overlay in the image display field. The items
to display and display position can be configured in the User Utility.
: Displays the “Patient Information Input box” or the menu to modify the
patient information.
:
Adds exposure menus and displays the “Exposure Menu Addition box”.
Changes exposure menus and displays the “Exposure Menu Change

:
box”.
Performs auto-repeat exposure. Exposures can be performed
:
repeatedly using the exposure menu same as the selected one.
: Handles a read image as a mix-exposed one.
: Adds the same exposure menu as the selected one.
: Deletes the selected exposure menus.
Registers the IP number. Click this if the IP number cannot be read by

:
the barcode reader.
/ : Scrolls the image display field list.
: Confirms or changes exposure parameters for the exposure menus

before making an exposure (image reading). Select , and the
“Exposure Parameter Selection box” is displayed. Buttons displayed on
the left of are shortcut buttons for the Setting box. They are set in
the User Utility.
 “9.9 Customizing the Screen Display”
: Changes film format.
: Displays an image in monitor mode.
4-4 897N203543D
Switches display mode alternately to six-image display mode. Screen

:
mode for the first study after starting up the Console can be set in the
User Utility.
Note
 In six-image display mode, only up to 18 exposure menus can be
displayed.
Temporarily suspends the auto-distribution function of images. This
/ :
icon is displayed only when [Distribute automatically at each reading]
has been selected in “Distribution setting 1” of the User Utility.
Delivers images individually. This icon is displayed only when
:
[Distribute the selected images] has been selected in “Distribution
setting 1” of the User Utility.
: Specifies priority output.
: Completes or suspends a study.
4.1.2 Starting a Study

Display the “Study screen” to start a study. Perform the appropriate operation depending on the
screen currently displayed.
By using the patient information display linking function (option) and the patient information
display terminal (sold separately), the patient information for the study being performed on the
Console can be confirmed in the exposure room.

For the patient information display linking function (option), observe the following precautions.
 When starting a study, make sure that the patient information on the display terminal and the
Console is that of the actual patient.
 Starting studies from the Exposure Menu Selection screen

Start a study received and checked on the “Patient Information Input screen” and “Exposure
Menu Selection screen”.
Select .
The “Study screen” is displayed.
Note
 Before image reading, make sure that the technique and exposure menu for the image to
be read are the same between the DR exposure unit and the Console.
 Make sure that the direction of the read image is the same as that of the auto-inputting
marker.
If the auto-pairing is enabled on the setting at the time of installation, the Console recognizes the
exposure menus for the right and left breasts that have the condition below as a pair when
starting a study or during the study (the paired exposure menus are called “paired menus”.).
 The exposure menus registered in a row have the same MPM code and the same image
laterality “L (Left)” and “R (Right)” (the registered order does not matter).
If you change to an exposure menu that does not meet the above condition, the auto-pairing is
disabled.
897N203543D 4-5
The “paired menus” is a prerequisite to use the functions of auto-film format setting and auto-
positioning.
 “4.1.9 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Setting the Multi-frame Format”
 “4.2.7 Mammography Image Positioning”
 Starting studies from the “Waiting Study list”

Studies stacked in the “Waiting Study list” can be executed.
Select a study, and then select .
The “Study screen” is displayed.

 “2.2 Study Information List”
When starting multiple studies at the same time

Multiple studies can be executed from the “Waiting Study list” at the same time for the same
patient.
To start multiple studies for the same patient at the same time, the following input items of the
patient information should be consistent with each other.
Note that the studies cannot be executed if these information items are different among studies
even if they are for the same patient.
 Patient ID
 Patient’s Name
 Sex
 Birth Date
Also, it is necessary that either of the following patient information items have been input.
 Patient ID
 Patient’s Name
Select studies for the same patient from the “Waiting Study list”, and then select .
A maximum of 12 studies can be selected at a time.
Note
 It is not allowed to start studies registered at the Console and those transmitted via RIS
(connection by DICOM MWM service) all together at the same time.
4-6 897N203543D
 Settings to get the next study started

The next study can be started without returning to the “Patient Information Input screen”.
At the start of the next study, patient information items other than in the “Technologist field” will
be cleared off.
(However, what is set in the User Utility is displayed for the “Sex field”.)
To return to the “Patient Information Input screen” or individual lists, wait for a few seconds while
holding down this icon ([Suspend Exposure]) to display the menu and then select one of
[Suspend Exposure], [Exposure Completed] and [Exposure/QA Completed].
4.1.3 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Confirmation and

Modification of Exposure Parameters
Make various settings for the exposure menus of the study before performing exposures
(reading images).
Confirm or change exposure parameters. This processing cannot be performed to the exposure
menus to which the IP registration and/or the image reading have been performed.
For an already-registered IP, setting image rotation/reversal ( ) is possible for the exposure
menu, if the image has not been read yet.
An appropriate condition for each parameter is already set by an exposure menu, perform these
operations accordingly.
Before image reading, select an exposure menu item. Then either select an exposure parameter
shortcut button to be changed and display the Setting box, or select to display the “Exposure

Parameter Selection box”. The display settings for the exposure parameter shortcut buttons
depend on the setting performed in the User Utility.
Note
 Exposure parameters vary by CR or DR.
 When CR and DR are switched after changing exposure parameters, the change will not
be reflected.
897N203543D 4-7
Exposure parameter shortcut buttons

4-8 897N203543D
When is selected, the “Exposure Parameter Selection box” is displayed.

Perform the setting, which is to be explained hereafter, and then select .
“Exposure Parameter Selection box”
To cancel the operation and close the box, select .

If you select the parameter display field next to an icon shown in the “Exposure Parameter

Selection box”, the setting box for that parameter is displayed. Icons shown in the “Exposure
Parameter Selection box” and “Exposure Parameter shortcuts” differ depending on the setting
performed at time of installation.
: Sets image reverse display.
: Sets EDR (Exposure Data Recognizer) mode.
: Sets the function (a special processing).
: Sets filing mode.
: Sets GPR setting information (optional).
: Sets the radiation field size and IP size.
: Sets the trimming size.
: Sets an image distribution code. (a code number that specifies a destination for
image distribution).
: Sets the pixel density of an image. (This setting cannot be changed in DR.)
: Sets the number of films to be output.
: Connects to the selected flat panel sensor in the panel AP mode. (This icon is not
displayed in the “Exposure Parameter Selection box”.)
897N203543D 4-9
When one of the exposure parameter shortcut buttons is selected, the setting box for the
selected parameter will be displayed. Perform appropriate operations referring to the following
explanation.
 Setting image rotation/reversal

Sets image reverse display.
Select the parameter display field of to display the setting box.
Select one of these icons and select .
“Reverse/Rotation Setting box”
: Frontal image.
: Reverses the image horizontally.
Depending on the setting performed at time of installation, the following buttons are displayed.
: Rotates the image 180 degrees.
: Reverses the marker vertically.
: Rotates the marker 90 degrees to left.
When the image is set to be flipped (horizontally or vertically), the flip marker is displayed
automatically on the read image. To make use of this function, it is required that necessary
settings have been made by a designated service supplier.
For change of the settings (type, color and default display position of the flip marker), consult our
official dealer or local representative.
In case the setting of the image reverse display is changed, the setting change will be cleared
and the initial setting is restored, if the exposure menus are changed or the images are switched
after image reading.
For the DR cassette, change the rotation setting after image reading.
Note
 If you change the image reversal setting for the right and left breast images that the auto-
positioning has already taken place, the auto-positioning is canceled.
4-10 897N203543D
 EDR mode
Sets EDR (Exposure Data Recognizer) mode.
Select one of the icons to make necessary settings, and then select .
“EDR Setting box”
: AUTO mode.

: SEMI AUTO mode.
: FIX mode. When this mode is selected, input S value (4 to 20047) in the “FIX field”.
Depending on the setting performed at time of installation, the following button is displayed.
SEMI-X mode. When this mode is selected, select a photometric position in the
:
“SEMI-X field” and input a D.ave value (0.30 to 2.64) of average density for a
photometric region.
: Manual EDR mode. When performing the manual EDR processing on the FCR
Image Reader, make it effective by selecting it in combination with other mode. Each
time selecting it, valid/invalid is switched alternately.
If this mode is effective, the combined mode (AUTO/SEMI AUTO/FIX) with it
indicates the EDR mode performed for the image the first time it is displayed at the
Console. For example, when it is combined with the AUTO mode, the manual EDR
processing can be performed for the images to which the AUTO mode processing
has been performed first.
When changing the value after image reading, change the S and L values on the “Image Edit
screen”.
 “4.5 Editing Images”
897N203543D 4-11
 Function
Sets the function (a special processing).
Select the parameter display field of to display the setting box. Select one of the icons.
“Function Setting box”
: Routine processing (normal exposure).
: Whole spine processing.

Usually it is set to the exposure menus for the Image-composition Processing
(optional). If it is set when the user’s unit does not have the image-composing
function, the image processing defined to this function is only applied to the
exposure menus.
Note
 Only the functions of and are selectable. You cannot switch to any other
function.
 Filing mode
Sets image saving mode for a storage device.

Select [OFF] (not to record) or [ON] (to record).
“Filing Mode Setting box”
4-12 897N203543D

If a storage device is not connected, this parameter is not valid.
 GPR (optional)
The grid pattern removal (GPR) is image processing that reduces a stripe pattern (or a moiré) in
the still grid which inhibits checking of the image.
If the still grid is used, the stripe pattern will appear on CR images and the moiré pattern on DR
images since CR images and DR images differ in pixel densities from each other.
Set the GPR mode.
Select the parameter display field of to display the “GPR Setting box”.
Select the icon for which you wish to make GPR settings.

“GPR Setting box”
To cancel the operation and close the “GPR Setting box”, select .
: Switches off the GPR setting.
: Switches on the GPR setting.
Note
 common to CR images/DR images
- Since the GPR uses a spatial filter to reduce the stripe pattern in the grid, images may
degrade in sharpness depending on the types and installation condition of the grid.
- Depending on the types and exposure conditions such as the tube voltage, a visual
stripe pattern in the grid may appear even after the GPR. In addition, if the grid has any
abnormalities such as skew, the stripe pattern may remain in part. If you are still
concerned about the stripe pattern after the GPR, adjust the exposure conditions, for
example.
- Set the GPR processing to ON only when a stationary grid is used.
- The GPR process is not to be performed for stitched images.
- The GPR processing results remain unaffected by a menu change.
- For images subjected to the GPR process, film annotation characters G is generated to
indicate that the GPR function was ON.
897N203543D 4-13
 DR images
- If the radiation field is narrowed down and an area where the grid is captured is too
small, the grid may not be detected. Be sure to make the radiation field 15 cm-square or
more.
- The intended densities are 40 to 44 line/cm, 60 line/cm, and 80 line/cm or more.
However, the 60 line/cm grid may not be detected due to variations in grid density
caused from manufacturing.
- Artifacts may be generated around metallic objects such as artificial joints and
protectors.
 CR images
- Enabled when 10 line/mm or 20 line/mm images are received. (disabled for 5 line/mm
images even when GPR is set to ON.)
- The applicable grid density is 34 line/cm or higher.
- Applies to both horizontally and vertically placed grids.There may be cases where
horizontally placed grids (parallel with scanning lines) cannot be removed depending on
the Image Reader image reading mode used.
- There are cases where stripes cannot be removed if the grid inclination is too large.
- The grid is detected approximately 1/3 of the area around the center of the panel, and if
the grid pattern is not within this area, processing may become disabled. To enable
processing, record images so that the grid is within approximately 1/3 of the area around
the center of the panel.
Panel
Detection area
H×1/3 H
W×1/3
4-14 897N203543D
 Radiation Field Setting

The radiation field size can be set.
After selecting the parameter display field of , the “Radiation Field Settings box” is displayed.
“Radiation Field Settings box”
To cancel the setting at the box, select .

<Radiation field size>
: Sets the radiation field size to 17” x 17”.
: Sets the radiation field size to 18cm x 43cm.
: Sets the reference position of the radiation field to the top.
: Sets the reference position of the radiation field to the center.
: Sets the reference position of the radiation field to the bottom.
Note
 When the technique is one other than upright, the reference position is always set to the
middle.
: Sets the orientation of the radiation field to the vertical.
: Sets the orientation of the radiation field to the horizontal.
897N203543D 4-15
 Auto-Trimming Setting
Adjustment for auto-trimming can be made.
Before executing an exposure (before registering the IP when the FCR cassette is used, before
performing the irradiation when the FCR or FDR built-in type is used) you can change the
trimming setting.
When the user authentication is enabled at the time of installation, you can give a user the
authority to use this trimming function by performing particular setting via the Table Setting.
 “9.2.1.1 Exposure Menu Setting”
After selecting the parameter display field of , the “Trimming Settings box” appears.
“Trimming Settings box”
To cancel the settings at the box, select .
<Trimming settings>
:
Allows the trimming setting in accordance with the radiation field setting.
: Trims a read image to the 17“ x 17“ size.
: Trims a read image to the 18cm x 43cm size.
4-16 897N203543D
Note
 The selectable auto-trimming sizes vary depending on the setting at the time of
installation.
 When the 2 on 1 format is active, you can choose from 8”x14”, 7”x10” or 5”x8” size for
auto-trimming, in addition to the above sizes.
 When the 4 on 1 format is active, 7”x8” size for auto-trimming is available, in addition to
the above sizes.
: Sets the reference position of trimming to the left-top.
: Sets the reference position of trimming to the left-middle.
: Sets the reference position of trimming to the left-bottom.
: Sets the reference position of trimming to the center-top.
: Sets the reference position of trimming to the center.
: Sets the reference position of trimming to the center-bottom.
Sets the reference position of trimming to the right-top.

:
: Sets the reference position of trimming to the right-middle.
: Sets the reference position of trimming to the right-bottom.
: Sets the orientation of trimming to the vertical.
: Sets the orientation of trimming to the horizontal.
<Trimming method>
Trims the image in accordance with the specified trimming size,

: reference position and orientation.
Trims the image at the position detected by the auto-recognition of

the radiation field, in accordance with the specified trimming size and
orientation.
Trims in the size of the region detected by the auto-recognition of the
radiation field or trims in the default size (the smallest size within
which the region detected by the auto-recognition of the radiation
field fits). The selection of trimming methods depends on the setting
at the time of installation.
Does not perform trimming.
897N203543D 4-17
The applied trimming size is shown in the exposure menu after the image is read. The size is
shown in either of the following forms.
 Size only:
Default trimming size.
 Size+*:
Non-default trimming size. The smallest size that the trimmed region can fit in is
shown. The hide/show display of this form depends on the setting at the time of
installation. Moreover, if the trimming frame's long side exceeds 17 inches, "*" will not
be displayed and the size will be notated in inch increments.
You can change the trimming setting on the “Image Editing screen” after the image is read.
Note that you cannot set the trimming range larger than the size of a read image.
Note
 The minimum trimming frame size is 4.1” x 4.1”.
 Trimming processing is not available for composed images or source images for
composition, even if the size of a read image is the same as that of the image before it has
been subjected to trimming processing as specified in “Trimming Size”.
However, composed source long-view images taken using a DR cassette can be trimmed.
 If the setting of the radiation field or the exposure size has been changed on the DR
exposure unit at the time of exposure, such a change will be reflected on the image.
 By modifying an exposure menu or replacing an image after image reading processing,
the trimming setting determined before such a change will be retained, thus resulting in
disabling retrimming processing at initial menu setting after such a change.
 If you would like to trim with sizes larger than 17" x 17", or sizes other than the default size,
select after the trimming with the free size is activated. In order to
activate the trimming with the free size, settings at the time of installation are necessary.
Note the following when using the automatic radiation field recognition function.
 Place lead characters and markers within the radiation field. Otherwise, error recognition may
occur.
R R R
Area recognized as the radiation field Trimming frame
4-18 897N203543D
 Do not make the radiation field too small. Short edges may lead to error recognition.
 Do not place artificial objects such as a protector or thick items on the radiation field edges. If
the radiation field edges are overlapped with such objects, the edges may be unclear and not
recognized.
If the radiation field is not recognized automatically or error recognition occurs as in the above
cases, the trimming frame may be displayed in an area different from the ROI. In such cases,

change the exposure method or adjust the trimming manually after exposure, as necessary.
 Distribution code
Sets the distribution code (a code number which specifies the destination of transfer) of the
image.
Select a distribution code, and then select .
“Distribution Code Setting box”
897N203543D 4-19
 Pixel density (for CR images)

Sets pixel density for the image.
Select one of the icons.
“Pixel density setting box”
: Cancels operation.
: Standard density.
: High density.
The 14” x 14” or 14” x 17” sized images to which the standard density is set will be reduce-sized
images (67%) when they are output to film with one-image format at destination units.
 Number of film output

Sets the number of films to be output.
Select or to set the number of output, and then select .
“Film Output Count Setting box”

In the User Utility, you can set up the number of films to be displayed as the initial value.
If the storage mode is set to “OFF”, do not set this parameter to “[0]”.
4-20 897N203543D
 Switching the panel AP mode connections
Select to connect to the selected flat panel sensor in the panel AP mode.
Note
 Connect in the panel AP mode only when a flat panel sensor which is equipped with the
panel AP mode is selected.
 is displayed during the connection switching. Do not operate the Console until the
display switches.
: Connects in the panel AP mode.
: Unconnected in the panel AP mode, or the selected flat panel sensor is not equipped
with the panel AP mode.
: Switches the connections to the panel AP mode.
4.1.4 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Changing the Order of

Exposure Menus
Moving selected exposure menus up and down will allow you to change order of those exposure
menus.

4.1.5 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Adding Exposure Menus
Exposure menus can be added. Perform operation appropriately depending on the selected
display mode of the “Study screen”.
Select .
897N203543D 4-21
The “Exposure Menu Addition box” is displayed.

Select a menu item in the menu group to display the desired exposure menu, and then select an
exposure menu (more than one menu can be selected). The selected exposure menu (s) is listed
in the “Selected Exposure Menu list” on the right side of the screen. (Only the added menu (s) is
displayed in the “Selected Exposure Menu list”.)
After selecting an exposure menu (s), select .
To cancel the operation and return to the “Study screen”, select .
4-22 897N203543D
 When adding study exposure menus at startup of multiple studies at the same time
Study menus can be added at startup of multiple studies at the same time. To add a study menu
at startup of multiple studies at the same time, select an exposure menu to be added on the
“Study screen”, and then select .
The exposure menu selected in the “Exposure Menu Selection box” will be added to the study
selected on the “Study screen”. Addition of exposure menus due to mis-exposure or auto-repeat
processing can be performed in the same manner.

1 2
1 The accession number and the patient ID are the same with each other.
2 A new menu is added to the selected “CHEST,FRN” menu.
Note
 If multiple studies include one for which only patient information is input but an exposure
menu is not registered, start the study individually and register an exposure menu.
897N203543D 4-23
4.1.6 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Changing Exposure

Menus
Exposure menus can be changed.
Both exposure menus before and after image reading can be changed.
Perform operations appropriately depending on the display mode selected on the “Study
screen”.
Select an exposure menu to be changed, and then select .
The “Exposure Menu Change box” is displayed. Select a menu item in the menu group to display
the desired exposure menu, and then select an exposure menu.
4-24 897N203543D
After selecting an exposure menu (s), select .

897N203543D 4-25
4.1.7 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Setting the Auto-repeat

Exposure
Exposures can be performed repeatedly with the same selected exposure menus automatically.
If the exposure menus of which exposure parameters have been changed are selected, the
change will be reflected on the exposure menus for auto-repeat exposure. However, the change
in the setting of image trimming will be canceled.
screen”.
Select the exposure menus for the auto-repeat exposure, and then select .
The auto-repeat exposure is set ( is displayed).
When the exposure menu to which the auto-repeat exposure is set as a default condition is
selected, is displayed automatically. The default configuration of auto-repeat exposure can
be set in the User Utility.
4-26 897N203543D
Whenever performing the image reading for the exposure menus to which the auto-repeat
exposure is set, the same exposure menus will be displayed (selected).
Repeat image reading processing as needed, and select to terminate it.
The auto-repeat exposure is released ( is displayed).
4.1.8 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Deleting Exposure Menus

Exposure menus can be deleted. Perform operations appropriately depending on the display
mode selected on the “Study screen”.
Note that only the exposure menus before image reading can be deleted. The exposure menus
after image reading cannot be deleted.
After selecting an exposure menu, select .

897N203543D 4-27
4.1.9 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Setting the Multi-frame

Format
(1) Auto-formatting of films (auto 2on1 setting for paired left/right image)
If the auto-pairing and the auto 2on1 setting for paired left/right image are enabled in the User
Utility on the setting at the time of installation, the 2 on 1 format is automatically applied to the
exposure menus recognized as a pair when starting a study.
Note
 In the auto 2on1 setting for paired left/right image, the 2 on 1 format is forcibly applied to
the paired exposure menus regardless of the film formats set in the study menus. Thus,
the film formats may differ from those that you set at the time of study menu registration.
(2) Auto-formatting of films (film format auto-2on1 setting)

If the film format auto-2on1 setting is activated in the User Utility, the 2 on 1 format will be
automatically applied to all exposure menus registered in executing study.
The images recognized as a pair are automatically output on a film, and the output takes place
in the order of exposure menus displayed. For example, “left-image for the first film (frame
position: 1)”, “right-image for the first film (frame position: 2)”, “left-image for the second film
(frame position: 1)” and “right-image for the second film (frame position: 2)”.
Note
 The film format auto-2on1 setting can be used only for exposure menus to which the one-
image format has been applied. Exposure menus to which the 2 on 1 format or auto 2on1
setting for paired left/right image has been applied are excluded.
(3) Formatting of films (other than (1) and (2))

If the auto 2on1 setting for paired left/right image and film format auto-2on1 setting are inactive,
the film format being set in the exposure menu will be applied in executing study.
4-28 897N203543D
(4) Changing Film Format

Multi-frame format change and re-composition of image position can be performed. Select
.
The display/non-display of this button can be set in the User Utility.

The “Film Format Change box” is displayed.
After completing the following operation according to the desired format, select .
 For one-image format

Select an image, and then select . (More than one image can be selected.)
 For two-image format (one right/left image)
Select an image, and then select . (More than one image can be selected.)
897N203543D 4-29
 For 2 on 1 format (two different images)

Select left image (frame position: 1), right image (frame position: 2), and select .
 For 4 on 1 format
Select upper left image (frame position: 1), upper right image (frame position: 2), lower left
image (frame position: 3) and lower right image (frame position: 4), and select .
The 2 on 1 format and the 4 on 1 format can be applied only to a menu for which the function
is set to [RT] (routine processing).
 “9.2.1.1 Exposure Menu Setting” - “ Exposure Parameter Setting”
It is also possible to select images set in other film and recompose them accordingly. All other
images selected from other films will be changed to the one-image format.
4.1.10 Switching between the Flat Panel Sensors

If you wish to temporarily use the flat panel sensor in other place during a study, press and hold
the selector of the flat panel sensor that you wish to switch in the exposure unit display field of
the “Study screen”.
The “Panel Switching window” appears.
Select the flat panel sensor that you wish to use in the “Panel Switching window”.
The “Study screen” reappears, and the color of the selector in the exposure unit display field
changes to that of the flat panel sensor selected in the “Panel Switching window”, indicating that
the flat panel sensors have been switched.
This change remains in effect until the current study is completed or suspended.
After the study is completed or suspended, the original setting will be restored.
4-30 897N203543D
Note
 Note the following when a flat panel sensor is shared with or is temporarily connected to
other Console.
- Even if a flat panel sensor in wireless communication mode is moved to a place where
other Console is located, the flat panel sensor still remains connected to the Console of
the original location.
Example: Moving a flat panel sensor in Exposure Room A to Exposure Room B
Exposure Room A Exposure Room B
Console Console
Flat panel sensor
Wireless communication

Control cabinet Control cabinet
Access point Access point
Power supply unit Power supply unit
When an exposure is made in Exposure Room B with a flat panel sensor for which the
automatic X-ray detection function is enabled, the image is read to the Console in
Exposure Room A, as illustrated above.
- After moving a flat panel sensor to a place where other Console is located, be sure to
connect the flat panel sensor to the power supply unit in the new location with a cable in
order to switch the connection.
 For details on how to switch the connection, see the operation manual for the flat
panel sensor.
897N203543D 4-31
4.2 Reading Images

Images after exposure can be read and displayed.
The auto-repeat exposure and re-exposure/additional exposure can be performed if necessary.
 “4.1.7 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Setting the Auto-repeat Exposure”
 “4.4 Performing Re-exposure and Additional Exposure”
screen”. Select an exposure menu to be read.
Note
 Before image reading, make sure that the technique and exposure menu for the image to
be read are the same between the DR exposure unit and the Console.
 Make sure first that the ShotReady (exposure ready status indicator) of the connected
devices status is lit green to be ready for making exposures, then start making exposures.
Depending on the settings at the installation, a sound with the lit ShotReady may also be
produced. Adjust the volume with the volume adjustment function for the PC as necessary.
 While performing exposure operations, including pressing the hand switch halfway down,
and changing the technique on the DR exposure unit, do not operate the Console. In
addition, while operating the Console, do not operate the DR exposure unit. If the
technique has been changed, make sure that the techniques are the same between the
Console and the DR exposure unit.
 When performing a general exposure, make sure that the exposure menu after image
reading is not selected. Add an exposure menu if necessary, and then perform the general
exposure with the added menu selected.
 “4.1.5 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Adding Exposure Menus”
 The display speed (high speed or normal) of images received depends on the setting at
installation.
 Make sure the exposure menu is selected before reading the unbarcoded image via FCR
Image Reader.
 When an exposure is performed, the exposure results are sent from the X-ray control unit
to the Console. When the Console receives exposure results while an arbitrary exposure
menu is selected, the icon for the results received ( ) will be displayed on the exposure
menu. If an exposure menu is not selected, the exposure results cannot be received.
When multiple exposure units are connected, the selectors will be displayed. Select one of the
exposure units to be used. (The exposure unit may be selected automatically depending on the
selected exposure menu.)
4-32 897N203543D
The selector name of the exposure unit to be used and the function are shown in the display field
for thumbnail images that have not yet been read.
In addition, the status of connected image readers (DR Image Reader, FCR Image Reader) is
displayed in the exposure unit display field. Displaying no icon indicates normal status;
inoperable, emergency mode activated.
Display example of DR Image Reader
: Normal
: Inoperable
: Emergency mode activated
Make sure that the direction of the read image is the same as that of the auto-inputting marker.
Note
 Regardless of whether the read image is horizontal or vertical, its size is displayed in
“short side x long side” format on the exposure menu.
 When reading an exposed image from a DR exposure unit, the read image can be
automatically trimmed to any of the following sizes.
(Default size)
16.6”x16.6” cassette image - 17”x17” (No trimming), 14”x17”, 14”x14”, 10”x14”, 10”x12”,
8”x10”, 18cmx43cm

13.6”x17” cassette image - 14”x17” (No trimming), 14”x14”, 10”x14”, 10”x12”, 8”x10”,
18cmx43cm
24cmx30cm cassette image - 24cmx30cm (No trimming), 8”x10”
(Free size)
A smaller image size than the read image size
 The Console can read an image that is taken by a DR exposure unit and saved to media in
FUJIFILM standard format.
 Depending on the settings at the time of installation, S value and L value are shown in the
exposure menu list after reading an image.
897N203543D 4-33
 Making an exposure in high sensitivity mode

An exposure in high sensitivity mode can be made only when the automatic X-ray detection
function of the flat panel sensor is active. appears at the bottom of the screen while the
function is active. Note that the setting must be done at the time of installation in order to use this
function.
Selecting displays a window that shows the time until high sensitivity mode turns off.
Note
 An exposure should be performed on the understanding of the Console operation
procedures. Select after completing the necessary preparation for an exposure.
 Ensure that Shot Ready (exposure ready status indicator) in the connected devices status
lights up before executing an exposure. If Shot Ready does not light up while the progress
window of high sensitivity mode is shown, select [Cancel] to exit from high sensitivity
mode. In the connected devices status, check the status of connected image readers
before re-entering into high sensitivity mode.
 If a warning message box appears while the progress window of high sensitivity mode is
shown, close the box and select [Cancel] to exit from high sensitivity mode. Re-enter into
high sensitivity mode after taking necessary actions in accordance with the warning
message.
If an exposure is made while the window is displayed, the image exposed in high sensitivity mode
will appear.
4-34 897N203543D
If a certain period of time elapses without making an exposure, the window will close. In case
that the MPM code of the selected exposure menu is “091E”, a white image (lag performance
verification image for quality control) will be displayed.
If the MPM code is other than “091E”, a message will appear to indicate that no image will be
displayed.
 Exposures applying extended image readout

When the automatic X-ray detection function is enabled, exposures can be performed for up to
10 seconds with the flat panel sensor that supports extended image readout.
For exposures applying extended image readout, use an exposure menu in which the number of

division exposures is set at 2 or more.
Note
 The exposure can be performed for up to 10 seconds only. Consequently, do not use this
function for the case that exceeds the limit.
 Use EI and DI values of the images obtained from the exposure applying extended image
readout as reference.
 High sensitivity mode cannot be used when an exposure menu for the exposure applying
extended image readout is selected.
 When the D-EVO3 panel AP mode is being used, the extended image readout cannot be
used.
 When the extended image readout is being used with the D-EVO3, use the automatic X-
ray detection function to make exposures.
Making an exposure with the D-EVO3

(1) Select the D-EVO3 selector, and select the exposure menu for division exposure.
The selected exposure menu will flash.
(2) If the flashing exposure menu is selected, then the following screen will be displayed.
897N203543D 4-35
(3) When the ShotReady for the connected device's status lights up, a screen will be
displayed which shows the progress until the extended image readout is turned off.
Note
procedures. Select the flashing exposure menu after completing the necessary
preparation for an exposure.
lights up before executing an exposure. If Shot Ready does not light up while the screen in
step (2) is shown, select . In the connected devices status, check the status of
connected image readers before reperform the operations.
 If a warning message box appears while the progress window of extended image readout
is shown, close the box and select . Reperform the operations after taking
necessary actions in accordance with the warning message.
 If is selected in the screens for steps (2) and (3), it will take time for the
ShotReady to light up.
(4) If an exposure is made within 10 seconds, the image exposed in the extended image
readout will appear.
If a certain period of time elapses without making an exposure, the following message
will appear, and the exposure menu will flash.
Making an exposure with the D-EVO2

(1) Select the D-EVO2 selector, and select the exposure menu for division exposure.
(2) If an exposure is made within 10 seconds, the image exposed in the extended image
readout will appear.
Note
procedures.
lights up before executing an exposure.
4-36 897N203543D
4.2.1 Display of Exposure Menus

When the automatic X-ray detection function is enabled for the flat panel sensor, the display of
exposure menus and the operation method of unfinished exposure menus vary, depending on
the setting at the time of installation.
If the setting is made at the time of installation to allow the change in the operation method of
unfinished exposure menus, you can select the desired method.
 Using Manual Mode (for power saving)

When you select an unfinished exposure menu, it blinks. By selecting the unfinished exposure
menu again while blinking, it stays on, and the flat panel sensor enters X-ray detection mode. At
this time, Shot Ready (exposure ready status indicator) in the connected devices status lights
green, allowing you to make an exposure.
Note
 If settings such as trimming setting are changed in X-ray detection mode, the lit exposure
menu starts blinking, and the flat panel sensor enters X-ray non-detection mode. Do not
make an exposure while the exposure menu is blinking, as the flat panel sensor cannot
detect X-rays.
 Using Auto Mode

When you select an unfinished exposure menu, the flat panel sensor enters X-ray detection
mode. At this time, Shot Ready (exposure ready status indicator) in the connected devices status
lights green, allowing you to make an exposure.

If the setting is made at the time of installation not to allow the changes in the operation method
of unfinished exposure menus, the operation method will be the same as when [Use Auto Mode]
is selected in the User Utility.
4.2.2 Switching Images

When one-image display mode is used, select the desired thumbnail and wait until a blue
thumbnail frame is displayed. Then, select another thumbnail. These two thumbnails will be
switched alternately.
When six-image display mode is used, keep the desired image selected and wait until the image
frame becomes blue. Then, select another image. These two images will be switched alternately.
Note
 To switch images with touch panel operation, press and hold a thumbnail for approximately
5 seconds. When switching with the mouse, press and hold a thumbnail for approximately
2 seconds.
 If image switching takes place for images to which the auto mammography image
positioning has been applied, the applied auto-positioning is cancelled.
897N203543D 4-37
4.2.3 Changing the Order of Exposure Menus
Select the exposure menu to be changed, and then select to display the “Exposure Menu
Change box”. Select another exposure menu in the “Exposure Menu Change box”, and then
select to switch these menus.
4.2.4 Scrolling the Exposure Menu List

If there are seven or more exposure menus, you can scroll the exposure menu list in one-image
display mode or the image display field in six-image display mode by clicking /
with an exposure menu selected. The exposure menu can be scrolled in the desired
direction.
4-38 897N203543D
The number of selected exposure menu positions and the total number of exposure menus are
displayed next to / .
1 Number of the exposure menu currently being selected among all exposure menus
4.2.5 Changing Displayed Image

Select a thumbnail image to change the image displayed on the left side of the screen.
4.2.6 Changing the Monitor Mode

In monitor mode, images are displayed in order as they are read. Monitor mode is enabled

beforehand. The monitor mode icon is shown in the bottom left of the display. For wide
monitor, it is shown in the image area operation.
When a thumbnail image is selected to change the display image, the monitor mode is released
( display) to give priority to display of that image. To set a monitor mode after the monitor
mode is released, select .
4.2.7 Mammography Image Positioning
 Auto-positioning
If the mammographic positioning is enabled on the settings at the time of installation and the
[Auto Image Positioning is Applied.] is selected for the [Mammography Image Positioning]
Settings in the User Utility, the vertical positions of the right and left mammography images are
adjusted automatically and the positions of the trimming frames are moved automatically.
Whether the auto-positioning took place or not can be checked in the overlay display or by the
mammography image positioning button. When the auto-positioning is performed, the
mammography image positioning button shows ; when not performed, the button shows .
897N203543D 4-39
<With auto-pairing enabled at the time of installation>

When the images captured with the exposure menus to be paired are read, auto mammography
image positioning is performed if the images meet the following conditions.
 The MPM codes of the exposure menus are specified as [MPM codes used for
mammographic positioning] on the mammographic positioning menu settings in the User
Utility.
 Sizes of the two images are the same (either of 18 cm x 24 cm or 24cm x 30 cm).
 The pixel densities of the two images are ultra-high density or high density, and the pixel
densities of the two images are the same.
 Both of the two images to be paired have been read.
 Neither of the exposure menus is specified as ones for mis-exposure images.
 A film format is the 2on1 format. The auto 2on1 setting for paired left/right image can
automatically change the menus recognized as a pair when starting the study, into 2on1
format.
<With the auto-pairing setting disabled at the time of installation>

The auto mammography image positioning takes place only when the images meeting the
following conditions are read.
 The MPM codes of the exposure menus are specified as [MPM codes used for
mammographic positioning] on the mammographic positioning menu settings in the User
Utility, and the right and left MPM codes are the same.
 The right and left breast images are of the same size, being assigned so that they are output
arranged on the same film. On the 2on1 format for image output, the first image is arranged
on the right and the second image is on the left.
 The chest wall is positioned on the left on the left-side image and on the right on the right-side
image.
 The positioning processing is not being performed.
 Both of the images to be paired are read.
 Sizes of the two images are the same (either of 18 cm x 24 cm or 24cm x 30 cm).
 The pixel densities of the two images are ultra-high density or high density, and the pixel
densities of the two images are the same.
 The read image is not set as a mis-exposure image.
When images meeting the conditions are read, selecting the mammography image positioning
button can switch the positioning status.
If [Auto Image Positioning is Not Applied.] is selected in the User Utility, the vertical positions of
the right and left breast images is not adjusted automatically, even though images that satisfy
the above requirements are read. If this is the case, select ON or OFF for positioning the right
and left mammographic images as necessary after image reading.
Note
 Check the positioning result in the overlay display.
 Note the following when editing image information on the “Study screen”.
After reading the right and left mammography images to be paired has been completed,
perform editing image information. Like in the example below, if auto-positioning is started
during editing image, the process is cancelled even when auto-positioning has been set.
Since the auto-positioning cannot be executed again, adjust positioning by using the
trimming adjustment. If this is the case, select the mammography image positioning button
to carry out the positioning.
4-40 897N203543D
1. Right mammography image is read.
2. Edit right mammography image.
3. Left mammography image is read in the

background.
4. Auto-positioning takes place.
5. Finish editing image information, and save the

setting. At this time, the process No. 4 is cancelled.

 Manual positioning
If you want to adjust the vertical positions of the right and left breast images manually, use the
trimming adjustment function to adjust the positions of the trimming frames. If the trimming
adjustment takes place, the auto-positioning is cancelled.
897N203543D 4-41
4.2.8 Highlighting Parameters

The image can be highlighted using the highlighting parameter icon shown in the exposure
menu. Much easier confirmation of gauze and/or a catheter in the image is expected.
: Highlighting OFF (switches to the Image Processing Parameters for 1-image format.)
Highlighting ON (switches to the Image Processing Parameters for Left Image on 2-

:
image format.)
Highlighting ON (switches to the Image Processing Parameters for Right Image on 2-
:
image format.)
Each time the icon is selected, it switches from   .
 For details on highlighting parameters, see Image Processing Parameter Setting in the
“9.2.1.1 Exposure Menu Setting”.
Note
 Applying the highlighting parameters does not always make the confirmation of all gauze/
catheters easier.
 Switching to , , or changes the image processing type (S/L/R) in

conjunction. In addition, changing the image processing type (S/L/R) switches the icon to
, , or accordingly.
 After the current highlighting parameters are applied to images, images are delivered to a
storage device.
4-42 897N203543D
4.3 Memory Exposure Mode

This section explains the batch acquisition of the images taken with a flat panel sensor that
supports memory exposure mode, the linking of images and exposure menus, and other related
operation.
To use this function, you need to set it at the time of installation.
Note
 The followings need to be recorded correctly in order to properly link an image and an
exposure menu. Also, pay due attention to the records when linking.
- Patient information
- Information to identify the flat panel sensor used for the exposure (e.g. color and serial
number to identify the flat panel sensor)
- Image No. at the time of the exposure (i.e. number displayed in the flat panel sensor,
which shows when the image was exposed)
- Information to identify the exposed image (e.g. exposure menu and anatomical region)
- Date and time that the images were retrieved (acquired) from the flat panel sensor to the
Console in a batch
 If memory exposure mode is started using a flat panel sensor, the communication with the
Console is disconnected and the following dialog is displayed.
 Even if an image is incorrectly exposed, always do the mis-exposure settings after linking Chapter 4 Executing Studies
the image to the exposure menu, do not clear ImageBox.

 “4.3.3 Clearing ImageBox”
897N203543D 4-43
4.3.1 Batch Acquisition of Images

The images stored in the flat panel sensor can be retrieved (acquired) in a batch.
Display the “Image Reader Status window” from the “Study List” or the “Patient Information
screen”. If images have been temporarily taken using a flat panel sensor in other places, see “9.4
Property Setting” to select in advance a flat panel sensor for the selector. Refer to “7.2.2 Image
Reader Status window” for displaying the “Image Reader Status window”.
You can check the number of images on the list when images are stored in the flat panel sensor.
Choose the target flat panel sensor from the list, and then select [Get Image(FPD->CSL)] .
Note
 When the “Image Reader Status window” is displayed from other than the “Study List” or
the “Patient Information screen”, [Get Image(FPD->CSL)] is not displayed. Display the
“Image Reader Status window” again from the “Study List” or the “Patient Information
screen”.
The following dialog is displayed while the images are being acquired by the Console, so please
wait.
4-44 897N203543D
Select when the following dialog is displayed after the acquisition of the images is
completed.
Note
 Once the acquisition of the images is completed, the images that have been stored in the
flat panel sensor are deleted. However, the images may not be deleted if the flat panel
sensor is mounted or unmounted or the sensor is turned off during their deletion. When the
images are remaining in the flat panel sensor, acquire them in a batch.
The acquired images will be stored in ImageBox.
 Refer to “4.3.2 Linking Images and Exposure Menus” for checking the images stored in

ImageBox and linking them to the exposure menus.
897N203543D 4-45
4.3.2 Linking Images and Exposure Menus

The images stored in ImageBox can be linked to the exposure menus.
Start a study for linking to display the “Study screen”.
If you want to check the images stored in ImageBox only, display the “Study screen” without
registering patient information and exposure menus.
From the exposure menu list, select the desired exposure menu for linking to the image (1).
If you want to check the images stored in ImageBox only, selecting the exposure menu is not
needed.
Choose the selector of the flat panel sensor from which you acquired the images according to
the procedure in “4.3.1 Batch Acquisition of Images” (2), and then select (3).
(1)
(2)
(3)
4-46 897N203543D
The “Image Library window” is displayed. In this window, you can check the images stored in
ImageBox and link them to the exposure menus.
1

1 Device name
2 Preview screen display field
Device name:
Name of the flat panel sensor or selector selected in the exposure unit display
field
Preview screen display field:
The images with the image Nos. are displayed. These images are the ones
acquired from the flat panel sensor selected in the exposure unit display field.
Among the preview images, select the desired image for linking to the exposure
menu.
Links the image selected in the preview screen display field to the
:
exposure menu selected in the exposure menu list.
/ : Displays the previous or next page of the preview screen display field.
897N203543D 4-47
 Image No.
The image No. is a sequence number that the flat panel sensor gives to each of the images at
every exposure. It tells you when each of the images in the flat panel sensor was taken. If the
images are acquired according to the procedure in “4.3.1 Batch Acquisition of Images”, their
image Nos. are renumbered.
If the images are acquired from the flat panel sensor to the Console while there is an unlinked
image, the image No. for the unlinked image is not be renamed (remains the same), and the date
and time of the acquisition is added after the image No. as shown below.
To link an image to an exposure menu, select the desired image in the “Image Library window”
and then select .
The confirmation dialog will appear. Confirm the combination of the image and the exposure
menu is correct and then select .
The image is linked to the selected exposure menu.

The image whose linking is completed is deleted from ImageBox and the “Image Library
window”.
If you wish to do linking continuously, the operations may vary depending on the settings of the
automatic selection function for exposure menus.
If the automatic selection function is on, the next exposure menu is automatically selected. So
you can continue linking.
If the automatic selection function is off, close the “Image Library window”. Select the target
exposure menu on the “Study screen”, and then display the “Image Library window” again.
4-48 897N203543D
On/off of the automatic selection function for exposure menus are determined by the settings at
the time of the installation.
When you check and link the image acquired from another flat panel sensor, select the target
selector on the “Study screen” and then display the “Image Library window” again.
Note
 Even if an image is incorrectly exposed, always link the image to the exposure menu and
then do the mis-exposure settings for the image.
 If you linked the image incorrectly, handle it as described below.
- In the same study:
Exchange the image for the correct one in the exposure menu list of the “Study screen”
or “Image Edit screen”.
- In other study:
Move the image to the correct study using the image move function. Also, change the
exposure menu on the “Study screen” or “Image Edit screen” as needed.
 To receive exposure results from the X-ray control unit, make sure to select exposure
menus before performing exposures.
In memory exposure mode, images are linked to exposure menus on the “Study screen”
after exposed. Consequently, exposure results cannot be received from the X-ray control
unit.
897N203543D 4-49
4.3.3 Clearing ImageBox

All the images that are not linked to the exposure menus can be deleted.
Note
 Before clearing ImageBox, always display the “Image Library window” via the “Study
screen” and confirm that necessary images do not remain. If you are using multiple flat
panel sensors, check all of them.
Start the User Utility.
 “9.1.2 Starting and Terminating the User Utility”
Select [Memory Exposure Mode].
Select [Clear ImageBox] on the “Memory Exposure Mode Utility screen”.
Selecting in the confirmation dialog deletes all images in ImageBox.
4-50 897N203543D
4.4 Performing Re-exposure and Additional Exposure

Re-exposure/additional exposure for the exposure menus in a study can be performed.
4.4.1 Re-exposure
Re-exposure for the exposure menu to which images have been read can be performed. Note
that the read images for this exposure menu will be handled as mis-exposures.
Select an exposure menu to be re-exposed, and then select .
The read image is handled as mis-exposure image, and the menu for re-exposure is displayed
(selected). Perform the image reading again.
(The image handled as mis-exposure image cannot be output to the external devices.)
897N203543D 4-51
To cancel the operation, select the exposure menu handled as mis-exposure, and select
again. The exposure menu for re-exposure remains as is.
If is selected, the “Mis-exposure Cause Input box” will be displayed depending on the setting
performed at time of installation.
4-52 897N203543D
When entering a cause of the rejection, is in the activated state, as shown below, which is
changed alternately every time it is selected.
From the drop-down list that opens, select a classification of the cause of mis-exposure.
“Mis-exposure Cause Input box”

Comments pre-determined for the classification will be listed in the box below the “Cause of mis-
exposure field”.
Select a cause from the displayed list.

The cause thus selected will be displayed in the relevant field. It is also possible to input any
characters in this field.
Classification and comments can be set in the User Utility.
Note
 When you are using the Retake Analysis function (Retake Analysis Software), make sure
to select any of the comments listed in the “[Cause of mis-exposure]” field. It is not allowed
to input a free comment with a keyboard, etc.
897N203543D 4-53
Input causes, and then select to close the box. The relevant image will thus be handled
as mis-exposure image.

The state of mis-exposure will not be changed. The box shown above opens also when
canceling the state of mis-exposure.
remains unselected. If is selected while in this state, the box will be closed to cancel
the state of mis-exposure.
Note
 Whenever a change was made for the [Classification], be sure to re-select the [Cause of
mis-exposure].
4.4.2 Additional Exposure

Additional exposure can be performed with the same exposure menus as those that have
already been selected. When performing additional exposure with other exposure menus, add
exposure menus by performing operations for adding exposure menus.
 “4.1.5 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Adding Exposure Menus”
Select the exposure menu to which additional exposures will be performed, and select . The
exposure menu for additional exposure is displayed (selected). Perform the image reading.
4-54 897N203543D
4.5 Editing Images

Information for displayed images can be edited.
The image processing function that includes image trimming or rotation is called the QA function.
Individual QA functions are assigned to the relevant shortcut buttons and displayed on the “Study
screen”.
 “5.6 Using Utility (QA Image Controller Buttons)”
 Square monitor
After displaying the desired image, select one of QA function shortcut buttons or .
Display settings for the QA function shortcut buttons (icons) can be set in the User Utility.
Double click on the image for a full-screen display.
QA function shortcut buttons
897N203543D 4-55
 Wide monitor
After displaying the target image, operate the image area operation and QA function shortcut
buttons, and check or edit the image.
Double click on the image for a full-screen display.
(1) (2)
(1) Image area operation

These buttons can be used to magnify/reduce, rotate, or control the displayed image with a
single touch. Drag and drop the mouse to relocate the button in the image area operation.
1 2
1 Displays the button for operation. Selecting control buttons enables to display or not to
display the button.
2 Displays control buttons.
(2) Shortcut for QA function

Shortcut buttons allocated to QA functions such as modifying image processing parameters are
displayed in the area.
The display settings for the image area operation and shortcut for QA function can be set in the
User Utility.
Note
 For wide monitor, the start-up button for the image browse software can not be placed in
the image area operation and shortcut for QA function.
4-56 897N203543D
 Common specifications for square monitor/wide monitor

Images can be magnified or reduced using multi-touch gestures on the monitor, only if a PC
available with multi-touch operation is used.
After displaying the target image, select . Image display field can be magnified when pinched
out with multi-touch operation, reduced when pinched in.
897N203543D 4-57
4.6 Copying Images

Shot images can be copied to unfinished exposure menus.
From thumbnail images in the exposure menu list, select an image for copy (1).
After selecting an unfinished exposure menu of copy destination (2), select (3).
(1)
(2)
(3)
Note
 Identification marker is displayed in a copied image. The position, font color, background
color and direction of the identification marker can be set in the “Marker/Annotation
Settings dialog box”.
 “5.4.6 Marker/Annotation Settings”
Be careful that the identification marker cannot be deleted.
 Images cannot be copied to shot images or IP registered exposure menus.
 In six-image display mode, cannot be selected.

 Exposure menus available for a copy source or destination are the ones with the following
functions set.
RT, TM, PS
 Exposure results cannot be copied from a source image. Copied image exposure results
cannot be displayed.
 If an exposure menu with exposure results received is specified as a copy destination and
copy is made, the combination of exposure results and the image is inappropriate.
 If images rotated by an arbitrary angle are copied, the identification or flip marker, or
automatic marker set to an exposure menu of copy destination may protrude from the
screen.
4-58 897N203543D
This describes the example of placing the automatic marker near the left center of the trimming
frame. As shown in the “Protruding case” below, the automatic marker may not be placed in the
area outside the image display area due to the arbitrary angle rotation.
<Marker within the image area>
Source image Copied image
Since the automatic marker is placed on the

image area, it can be verified.
<Protruding case>

Source image Copied image
The automatic marker is not placed.
 If an image is copied mistakenly, set it as a mis-exposure image.
897N203543D 4-59
The image processing is applied to copied images as follows:
Classification Item Applying copy Applying exposure

source image menu settings of
settings copy destination
Image reversal/ rotation 
EDR mode 
Function 
Filing mode 
Size/Reference position of radiation

field
Distribution code 
Pixel density (for CR) 
Film format 
No. of output film 
Tube/Technique code 
EIt value 
Exposure parameter
Specifying image position 
Film mark 
Reading sensitivity center shift (for

CR)
Film reference orientation 
Film edge 
Film size 
Number of division exposure 
Coding scheme designator 
Image reading mode (for CR) 
Sensitivity level for velocity (for CR) 
Various fill density 
GA/GS 
S value/L value 
FCR image processing parameter 
FNC/CRF 
VGP Parameter 
ON/OFF for VGP 
Image processing
Marker/Annotation *1 *1
Blackening processing *2 *2
Chest wall paintout processing 

Trimming *1 *1
Image arbitrary rotation 

GPR 
4-60 897N203543D
Classification Item Applying copy Applying exposure

source image menu settings of
settings copy destination
Image laterality/ Patient orientation 
DX parameter Anatomic region 
View code/ View modifier code 
Permissible range for Permissible range for S/L values

S/L values
Mis-exposure image information 
Others Mammographic positioning 
Smart-QA 
*1 Adjusted to the User Utility settings.

*2 Copy source image settings are applied to the blackening processing area, while copy
destination exposure menu settings to the paint density.
897N203543D 4-61
4.7 Image Delivery

Read images are delivered automatically. Conditions determined in the “Auto-delivery setting” of
Property Setting of User Utility are applied.
Note
 When outputting the image exposed by the DR exposure unit (SID=100 cm (39.4 in.)) to
film, the displayed size is different as follows:
- The image exposed in an upright position is displayed about 5% larger than the actual
object.
- The image exposed in a supine position is displayed about 10% larger than the actual
object.
 The Console includes a function that reduces these errors. With the use of this function,
the image is reduced based on the exposure plane size and then it is delivered. (Whether
this processing is executed or not depends on the setting at the time of installation.) In
case of projection exposure and oblique direction exposure, magnification ratio is different
in each image area. Distance correction is performed from the center of the panel over the
entire image area, resulting in the errors above. Keep this in mind when using the
correction function. This function is available only if images are read from devices that can
send exposure distance.
 “#” will be printed on film output after distance correction is performed.
 If the flip marker is set outside the trimming frame by changing the frame position, the
image is delivered without the flip marker embedded.
 Be sure to check the image before delivering it.
 Enlarge an image exposed by the DR exposure unit for the cassette to the same size as
the one trimmed after exposed using the built-in type DR exposure device, and the image
can be delivered (this function is called “standard size output”). Standard size output can
be performed by bordering the image with the density set at [Various Fill Density] in the
User Utility. Settings at the installation are necessary to use this function.
- Even if the trimming size is the same, the output image size may differ depending on the
presence/absence of application of this function. Consequently, please note that
displaying an image output by the Console to fit in window after delivery may result in the
different magnification ratio while the trimming size is the same. When an image
compared with the one output by the Console without this function, the ratio will also
differ.
- If the image applied with this function is processed after delivery, artifacts may occur
around the image. In addition, if the image is acquired again after delivery using this
function and the image processing is performed, artifacts may occur.
 Image resolution output from the Console will differ depending on the specification of the
exposure unit and the settings performed at the time of installation. Keep in mind the
possibility that the display enlargement ratio of the image on the output device will change
when using this function.
4-62 897N203543D
4.7.1 Image-based Distribution

An image is delivered at the specified timing for each. Images not delivered for each are
delivered at the specified timing for each study.
 Distribute automatically at each reading

An image is automatically delivered at each reading.
Selecting switches to and pauses auto-delivery of all images to be read. To
cancel the pause, select to switch to .
One-image display mode Six-image display mode
The icon is displayed on the exposure menu whose image delivery started.

1 1
1 Delivery completion
897N203543D 4-63
 Distribute the selected images

By using the individual delivery button on the “Study screen”, a read image will be delivered
individually.
Select after selecting the exposure menu for a read image, the image is delivered
individually.
The icon is displayed on the exposure menu to which an instruction of image delivery is given.
1 1
1 Delivery completion
 Do not distribute by the image

Auto-delivery is not performed during a study, and the delivery is performed at the specified
timing for each study.
4-64 897N203543D
4.7.2 Study-based Distribution

An image is delivered at the specified timing for each study. Images not delivered for each image
are also delivered at the specified timing for each study.
 Distribute automatically after the study completion

When a study is completed, the image will be automatically delivered.
 Distribute automatically after the QA completion

When image editing (QA) is completed, the image will be automatically delivered.
897N203543D 4-65
4.8 Suspending Studies

Exposures can be suspended to hold the current study. Operate appropriately depending on the
status of study process.
 In the case that the image reading has been done for all exposure menus in the study
Wait for a moment while holding down to display the menu, and then select
. The study will be suspended and stacked in the “Waiting Study list”.
 In the case that the exposure menus for unread images remain in the study
Select .
The condition set in [The method at the time pushed "Study Finish" button (The unregistration
menu exists.)] field is applied at the Property Setting of the User Utility.
If an exposure menu, for which IP has been registered but the image not yet read, is remaining
unprocessed, the study will be suspended for all exposure conditions. In such cases, the study
will be stacked in the “Waiting Study list”.
When starting multiple studies at the same time:

Similarly, exposure conditions set up in [The method at the time pushed "Study Finish" button
(The unregistration menu exists.)] field will also be applied, when starting multiple studies at the
same time.
If the exposure menus have not read the image, the study will be suspended or deleted,
depending on the pre-determined settings.
Explained herein are the conditions set in the [The method at the time pushed "Study Finish"
button (The unregistration menu exists.)] field in the User Utility configuration settings and those
applied when a study is ended.
The unregistration menu is deleted, and study is finished:

If this condition is set, the study is completed deleting the exposure menus to which the image
has not been read. So, the study cannot be suspended. To suspend the study, perform the same
operation as in the case when image reading has been done for all exposure menus in the study.
4-66 897N203543D
The unregistration menu is not deleted, and study is suspended:

If this condition is set, the study is suspended without deleting the exposure menus to which the
image has not been read. The study will be stacked in the “Waiting Study list”.
The dialog of the confirmation is indicated:

If this condition is set, the following confirmation box is displayed.
To suspend a study, select .

The study is suspended without deleting the exposure menus to which the image has not been
read. The study will be stacked in the “Waiting Study list”.
To delete automatically the exposure menus to which the image has not been read and complete

the study, select .
897N203543D 4-67
4.9 Completing Studies

This section explains completion of the current study. Operate appropriately depending on the
status of study process.When is selected before completing the study, the priority of
image output can be set.
 In the case that the image reading has been done for all exposure menus in the study
Select .
The condition set in [The method at the time pushed "Study Finish" button (There is no
unregistration menu.)] at the Property Setting of the User Utility is applied.
The condition set at [The method at the time pushed "Study Finish" button (There is no
unregistration menu.)] will also be applied in the same manner for multiple studies started at the
same time.
button (There is no unregistration menu.)] field in the User Utility configuration settings and those
[Finish exposure only]:

If this condition is set, the exposure is terminated, and the study will be stacked in the “Waiting
QA list”.
4-68 897N203543D
[Finish exposure and QA]:

If this condition is set, the exposure and the image editing (QA) are terminated, and the study is
stacked in the “Finish QA list”.
For multiple studies starting at the same time, both exposure and image edit (QA) will be finished
for all the studies.
If the images have been read, the study will be stacked to the “Finish QA list”.
If terminating exposures with a different condition from the setting of the User Utility, wait for a
moment while holding down to display the menu, and select or
.
[Suspend Exposure]:
The exposure is stopped halfway through processing and the current study is suspended.

 “4.8 Suspending Studies”
[Exposure Completed]:
The exposure is terminated, and the study is stacked in the “Waiting QA list”.
This menu will be disabled if [Storage output] is set to “Distributes automatically at each reading”
or “Distributes automatically after study completion” on the “Distribution setting 1” tab of the
Property Setting in User Utility.
[Exposure/QA Completed]:
The exposure and the image editing (QA) are terminated. The study is stacked in the “Finish QA
list”.
For multiple studies starting at the same time, both exposure and image edit (QA) will be finished
for all the studies.
If the images have not been read for the exposure menu, the study will be added to the “Waiting
Study list” or deleted, depending on the setting performed in the User Utility.
If the study concerned is IP-registered, but whose images have not been read, the study will be
stacked to the “Waiting QA list”.
Furthermore, if the images have been read, the study will be stacked to the “Finish QA list”.
897N203543D 4-69
 In the case that the exposure menus for unread images remain in the study
Select .
The condition set in [The method at the time pushed "Study Finish" button (The unregistration
menu exists.)] at the Property Setting of the User Utility is applied.
If an exposure menu, for which IP has been registered but images not yet read, is remaining
unprocessed, the study will be suspended for all exposure conditions. In such cases, the study
will be stacked in the “Waiting Study list”.
The exposure can be completed with a different condition from the setting of the User Utility.
 “4.9 Completing Studies” - “ In the case that the image reading has been done for all
exposure menus in the study”
button (The unregistration menu exists.)] field in the User Utility configuration settings and those
The unregistration menu is deleted, and study is finished.:

If this condition is set, the exposure menus of unread images are deleted automatically, and the
study is completed accordingly. The completing action will be either [Finish exposure only] or
[Finish exposure and QA] following the condition applied in the previous section.
The unregistration menu is not deleted, and study is suspended.:

If this condition is set, the study is suspended without deleting the exposure menus to which the
image has not been read. So, the study cannot be completed. When completing the study, use
the same procedure as for (1) In the case that the image reading has been done for all exposure
menus in the study to complete the exposure with different condition from the setting of the User
Utility.
The dialog of the confirmation is indicated:

If this condition is set, the following confirmation box is displayed.
“Confirmation box”
4-70 897N203543D
To finish this study, select .

The exposure menus will be terminated deleting those menus to which the images have not been
read automatically. The completing action will be either [Finish exposure only] or [Finish
exposure and QA] following the condition applied in the previous section.
To suspend the study to which the image has not been read without deleting the exposure menu,
select .
897N203543D 4-71
4-72 897N203543D
Chapter
5 Editing Images
5.1 Image Edit Screen

This is a screen for editing image information during a study and also after a study.
For image information editing during a study, processing such as image information editing and
film output will be performed on images read on the “Study screen”.
For image information editing after a study, processing such as image information editing and
image output will be performed on images for a study that the exposure is complete.
1
3 4

2 QA image controller buttons
4 QA function button display field
897N203543D 5-1

Displays the patient’s information for the displayed image.
When the birth date has been input as patient’s information, the patient’s age at
the time of image reading is displayed.
Image display field:
Displays the image to be edited. Exposure result information can also be
displayed as an overlay.
QA function button display field:
Displays the QA function buttons used in image editing.
QA image controller buttons:
Controls the various utility functions (magnifying display images, alternatively
switching image processing type, reprinting display image, setting mis-exposure
images, and locking study data).
Exposure result display field:
Displays the exposure result as an overlay in the image display field. The items
to display and display position can be configured in the User Utility.
Resets the edit results for image information.
:
 “5.7 QA Reset”
or :
Terminates image information editing and returns to the previous screen.
However, the display varies depending on how the “Image Edit screen” has
been displayed.
If this screen has been displayed by selecting in the “Study screen”,
is displayed. Otherwise, is displayed.
Note
 The User Utility can configure the environment for displaying the QA function buttons and
QA image controller buttons.
5-2 897N203543D
5.2 Displaying Screen

To edit an image after a study, select a study that the exposure is complete from the study list
and then select . To edit an image during a study, show the image on the “Study
screen” and then select .
Selecting the desired study and editing an image (Image editing after a study)

Editing the image displayed on the “Study screen” (Image editing during a study)
 Changing the image/study
For a study that includes multiple images, the previous or next image can be displayed if or
(image change) is selected after the screen has opened. When multiple studies are
selected, images of the previous or next study can be displayed if or (study change) is
selected after an image has been displayed.
While editing an image during a study, the image cannot be switched to an image read while
displaying the “Image Edit screen”. After returning to the “Study screen”, select again and
edit an image.
Change images/studies
1
897N203543D 5-3
5.3 Changing GA/GS

On the “QA main screen”, the GA (contrast) value and GS (density) value can be adjusted. Note
that the setting must be done at the time of installation in order to use this function.
The GA/GS values are shown below the QA function button display field.
When you move the mouse cursor to the image display field, the cursor changes to . Then,
move the cursor vertically or horizontally while pressing the left mouse button. Or, put your finger
on the image display field of the touch screen and sweep it vertically or horizontally.
When you move the cursor or finger up, the GA value is increased. When you move the cursor
or finger down, the GA value is decreased
When you move the cursor or finger to right, the GS value is increased. When you move the
cursor or finger to left, the GS value is decreased
To determine the GA/GS values, release your finger from the left mouse button or the screen.
Note
 Even when you move the cursor outside the image display field, the values can still be
changed as long as you keep pressing the left mouse button. Or, even when you sweep
your finger outside the image display field, the values can still be changed as long as you
keep placing your finger on the screen.
 Even when you move the cursor or finger up or to right when the GA/GS values have
reached their maximums, these values do not change anymore. Even when you move the
cursor or finger down or to left when the GA/GS values have reached their minimums,
these values do not change anymore.
 If you move the cursor or finger diagonally, the GA/GS values are changed simultaneously.
5-4 897N203543D
 To reset the GA/GS value to the default, adjust the value using the image processing
parameter adjustment function.
 “5.4.4 Adjusting Image Processing Parameters”
897N203543D 5-5
5.4 Editing Images

It is possible to edit the information of the displayed image by using the following QA functions
of the “Image Edit screen”: [Order Information Modification], [Rotation/Reversal Settings], [S/L
Value Modification], [Image Processing Parameters Adjustment], [FNC/CRF Processing
Adjustment], [Marker/Annotation Settings], [Blackening Processing Settings], [Trimming
Settings], [Image Stitching Settings], [Output Settings], and [Exposure List].
It is also possible to select whether to finalize or suspend the edits to the image.
5.4.1 Modifying Order Information
Select to display the “Order Information Modification dialog box”.
At the “Order Information Modification dialog box”, edit the exposure menu, exposure
technologist, film mark, comments, and incidental information.
5-6 897N203543D
 Changing exposure menus

Exposure menus can be edited.
(1) Select .
“Exposure Menu Change box”
Exposure menu selection button:

Select the exposure menu selection button to display the “Exposure Menu
Change box”.
After selecting the exposure menu, select .

To cancel an operation and close the “Exposure Menu Change box”, select
.
897N203543D 5-7
Note
 If you change the exposure menus for images to which the mammography image auto-
Anatomical region description:

Enter the name of the exposure region (a maximum of 16 characters).
Exposure menu name:
Enter the name of the exposure menu (a maximum of 64 characters; * and @
cannot be used).
(2) After selecting the exposure menu, select or .
 Editing exposure technologist information

Technologist information can be edited.
(1) Select .
“Technologist Information Edit dialog box”

The technologist specified in the User Utility is displayed.
(2) Use or to change the page. A maximum of 144 technologists in 10 pages can be
registered.
(3) After editing the technologist (user), select or .
Note
 The technologist cannot be changed if even one image has been output.
5-8 897N203543D
If the “Checkout by technologist box” opens when changing the technologist

displayed in the “Technologist field”
When the user authentication has been specified to be used according to the settings at
installation, an attempt to change the technologist (user) in the “Technologist” field will display
the “Checkout by technologist box”.
(1) Input a new user name and password, and then select .
The technologist shown in the “Technologist Information Edit dialog box” will then be changed
accordingly. (Note that a logged-in technologist will not be changed.)
“Checkout by Technologist box”
When the user authentication is being used in the Windows Active Directory
The “Technologist Information Edit dialog box” will be displayed as follows.
Select , and authenticate the technologist.
897N203543D 5-9
 Editing the film mark

Film marks can be edited.
(1) Select .
“Film Mark Edit dialog box”

Film marks specified in the User Utility is displayed.
(2) Use or to change the page. A maximum of 144 film marks in 10 pages can be
registered.
(3) After editing film marks, select or .
5-10 897N203543D
 Editing comments
Comments can be edited.
(1) Select .
“Comments Edit dialog box”
[Study comments]:
Enter a comment for the study.

Up to 1024 characters can be entered.
[Image Comment]:
Enter a comment for the image.
Up to 1024 characters can be entered.
(2) After editing comments, select or .
897N203543D 5-11
 Changing Incidental Information

The patient orientation, image laterality, view code and view modifier code sequence can be
changed.
Note
 The patient orientation of the mammographic image cannot be changed. Also, the view
code and view modifier code sequence of an image other than mammographic image
cannot be changed.
 To set the view code and view modifier code sequence, the prior setting at the time of
installation is required.
(1) Select .
Changing patient orientation
(1) Select to display the “Patient Orientaion Change box”.
(2) Change the orientation of the patient displayed.
: H (head) direction
: F (foot) direction
: L (left) direction
: R (right) direction
5-12 897N203543D
: A (anterior) direction
: P (posterior) direction
(3) Select to cancel the operation and close the “Patient Orientaion Change box”.
Changing image laterality
(1) Select to display the “Image Laterality Change box”.
(2) Change the laterality of the displayed image.
: L (left)
: R (right)
: B (both left and right)
: U (unpaired)

(3) Select to cancel the operation and close the “Image Laterality Change box”.
Note
 After having the auto-paring for mammography enabled at the time of installation, if the
image laterality change takes place for the paired exposure menus, the pairing will be
cancelled. If the mammography image auto-positioning took place, the auto-positioning is
canceled in accordance with the cancellation of the paring.
Changing the view code sequence

It is possible to set the view code sequence attached to the displayed image.
(1) When is selected, the “View Code Sequence Change box” is displayed.
897N203543D 5-13
(2) Select an appropriate icon in the “View Code Sequence Change box”, and then select
.
“View Code Sequence Change box”
(3) Select to cancel the setting and close the “View Code Sequence Change box”.
Note
 Unless the view code is not set, the information on the view modifier code that has been
set will be deleted.
Changing the view modifier code sequence

It is possible to set the view modifier code sequence attached to the displayed image. This
function is used to clarify the view of the image.
(1) When is selected, the “View Modifier Code Sequence Change box” is displayed.
(2) Select an appropriate icon in the “View Modifier Code Sequence Change box”, and then
select .
“View Modifier Code Sequence Change box”
(3) Select to cancel the setting and close the “View Modifier Code Sequence
Change box”.
Note
 Unless the view code is not set, the information on the view modifier code that has been
set will be deleted.
5-14 897N203543D
5.4.2 Rotation/Reversal Settings

The displayed image can be reversed and rotated.
(1) Select to display the “Rotation/Reversal Settings dialog box”.
“Rotation/Reversal Settings dialog box”
(2) After rotating or reversing the image with either of the following icons, select

or .
: Rotates the image 90 degrees to left.
: Rotates the image 180 degrees.
: Rotates the image 90 degrees to right.
: Reverses the image vertically.
: Rotates the image by an arbitrary angle.

The Image can be rotated to an arbitrary degree in the “Trimming Settings
dialog box”. Select to display the “Trimming Settings dialog box”. To
use this function, settings are required at the time of installation.
 “5.4.8 Trimming Settings”
Note
 If you change the rotation/reversal settings for the mammographic images to which the
auto-positioning of left and right breast images has been applied, the applied auto-
positioning is cancelled.
 For the image rotated arbitrarily, rotating 90 degrees to left, 180 degrees, 90 degrees to
right, or reversing vertically or horizontally resets the adjusted angle.
897N203543D 5-15
 Flip marker
Selecting horizontal or vertical flip automatically displays the flip marker on the image. Releasing
the flip setting deletes the flip marker automatically. To use this function, however, prior setups
by a designated service supplier are required.
1 Flip marker
The position, font color, background color and direction of the flip marker can be set in the marker
input box.
 “5.4.6 Marker/Annotation Settings”
But the flip marker cannot be deleted.
Note
 The flip marker cannot be displayed on the following images:
- Flipped image obtained using the optional Network Image Search Software or Media
Storage Software
- Flipped image exposed using the Image Reader connected with the Console whose
software version is older than V4.0
- Flipped image with the flip marker set outside the trimming frame
 If the source image for image composition processing (option) is flipped, the composed
image is also flipped, and the flip marker on the first source image is displayed on the
composed image. The flip markers on the second and subsequent source images are not
reflected to the composed image.
5-16 897N203543D
5.4.3 Modifying the S and L Values

The buttons for modifying the S and L values can be placed in the QA function button display
field of the QA main screen.
The adjustment mode can be changed.
Modify the S value and the L value.
(1) Select to display the “S/L Value Modification dialog box”.

“S/L Value Modification dialog box”
ROI adjustment button

:
Automatically determines the density and contrast for the best viewing of ROI in
the image.
 “5.4.3 Modifying the S and L Values” - “ Automatic adjustment of S value
and L value”
Manual adjustment button
:
Modify the S value and L value manually.
[S]: The center point of the image reading sensitivity decided by the EDR (Exposure
Data Recognizer function).
When an incident X-ray dose increases, this value decreases, and when an
incident X-ray dose decreases, it increases.
This value can be set in the range of 4 to 20047.
[L]: The image reading latitude decided by EDR. It shows the range of incident X-
ray dose (from minimum to maximum) as logarithmic values.
This value can be set in the range of 0.50 to 4.00.
897N203543D 5-17
 Automatic adjustment of S value and L value
(2) Select .
In ROI, click and specify two points, the point with the highest density and the point with the
lowest density (in no particular order).
Areas that can be specified as the ROI are in areas that have images.
ROI
The values change.

To apply settings, select .
To make settings again, select , click and specify two points, the point with the highest
density and the point with the lowest density in ROI.
(3) After the S value and L value are automatically adjusted, select or
5-18 897N203543D
 Manual adjustment of S value and L value
(2) Select .

(3) Select , , , or to change values, and then select .
The changed values will be reflected on the display image.
“S/L Values Setting box”

This value can also be changed by moving the displayed when the mouse is inside the image
display area.
(4) After modifying the values, select or .
897N203543D 5-19
Note
 When you change the density and contrast of the image, adjust the GA value and the GS
value. When you adjust the S vale and the L value via the Console and change the density
and the contrast (especially lower the L value to increase contrast) under the setting that a
pre-processing image is output and image processing takes place at the distribution
destination, an image has a narrow density range. As a result, an image shown at the
distribution destination may have “blown out highlights” and “blocked up shadows”. Also,
you can check the presence of “blown out highlights” and “blocked up shadows” on an
image by setting MDE parameter in the “FCR Image Processing Adjustment dialog box” to
“0”.
 When parameters are adjusted via mouse operation, only gradation processing takes
place. When is selected, gradation processing and other types of image
processing such as spatial frequency processing take place. For this reason, an image
shown on the screen before and after is selected may look different. Check an
image shown on the screen carefully when you selected after parameters are
changed.
5.4.4 Adjusting Image Processing Parameters

The values of the GP (Total Conversion Processing), RP (Spatial Frequency Processing), DRC
(Dynamic Range Control Processing), TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression Processing),
MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing) and PEM (Pattern Enhancement Processing for
Mammography) of the displayed image can be modified.
(1) Select to display the “FCR Image Processing Adjustment dialog box”.
“FCR Image Processing Adjustment dialog box”
5-20 897N203543D
(2) According to the image processing to be enabled, select [GP/RP/DRC] or [GP/MFP].
Note
 The default value of each parameter is displayed in parentheses in the parameter
adjustment area. To reset each parameter to the default, set the same value as in
parentheses.
 GP/RP/DRC settings
Modify the GP (Tonal Conversion Processing), RP (Spatial Frequency Processing), DRC
(Dynamic Range Control Processing), TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression Processing)
and PEM (Pattern Enhancement Processing for Mammography) values of displayed images.
(1) Select .

“FCR Image Processing (GP/RP/DRC) Adjustment dialog box”
: GP parameter adjustment area

 [GA]: -4.0 to 0.1, 0.1 to 4.0 (the first decimal place
excluding 0.0)
 [GT]: A to Z, a to z (52 types)
 [GC]: 0.30 to 2.64 (the second decimal place)
 [GS]: -1.44 to 1.44 (the second decimal place)
: RP parameter adjustment area
 [RN]: 0 to 9 (10 types)
 [RT]: A to Z, a to z (52 types)
 [RE]: 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place) 10 to 16 (no
decimal place)
: DRC selection button
Select the button to activate the DRC parameters.
897N203543D 5-21
: DRC parameter adjustment area

 [DRN]: 0 to 9 (10 types)
 [DRT]: A to Z, a to z (52 types)
 [DRE]: 0.0 to 2.0 (no decimal place)
: TAS selection button
Select the button to activate the TAS parameters.
: TAS parameter adjustment area
 [ORN]: 0 to 9 (10 sizes)
 [ORE]: 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place) 10 to 16 (no
decimal place)
 [ORD]: 0 or 1
: PEM selection button
Select the button to activate the PEM parameters.
: PEM parameter adjustment
 [PRN]: A to Z (26 types)
 [PRE]: 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place), 10 to 16 (no
decimal place)
 [PTE]: A to Z (26 types)
 [PTC]: A to Z (26 types)
(2) Select and to change each value, and then select .

The PEM processing results will be reflected on the magnified image only (settings at installation
are needed).
5-22 897N203543D
 GP/MFP settings
Modify the GP (Tonal Conversion Processing), TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression
Processing), MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing) and PEM (Pattern Enhancement
Processing for Mammography) values of displayed images.
(1) Select .
“FCR Image Processing (GP/MFP) Adjustment dialog box”

: GP parameter adjustment area
 [GA]: -4.0 to 0.1, 0.1 to 4.0 (the first decimal place
excluding 0.0)
 [GT]: A to Z, a to z (52 types)
 [GC]: 0.30 to 2.64 (the second decimal place)
 [GS]: -1.44 to 1.44 (the second decimal place)
: MFP parameter adjustment area
 [MRB]: A to Z (26 types)
 [MRT]: A to Z, a to z (52 types)
 [MRE]: 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place) 10 to 16 (no
decimal place)
 [MDB]: A to Z (26 types)
 [MDT]: A to Z, a to z (52 types)
 [MDE]: 0.0 to 2.0 (the first decimal place)
: TAS selection button
Select the button to activate the TAS parameters.
: TAS parameter adjustment area
 [ORN]: 0 to 9 (10 sizes)
 [ORE]: 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place) 10 to 16 (no
decimal place)
 [ORD]: 0 or 1
897N203543D 5-23
: PEM selection button

Select the button to activate the PEM parameters.
: PEM parameter adjustment
 [PRN]: A to Z (26 types)
 [PRE]: 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place), 10 to 16 (no
decimal place)
 [PTE]: A to Z (26 types)
 [PTC]: A to Z (26 types)
(2) Select and to change each value, and then select .

The PEM processing results will be reflected on the magnified image only (settings at installation
are needed).
5.4.5 Adjusting FNC/CRF Processing

FNC (Frequency Noise Control Processing) and CRF (Sharpness) can be specified.
(1) Select to display the “FNC/CRF Processing Adjustment dialog box”.
If the optional Virtual Grid Software is installed, select , then select .
“FNC/CRF Processing Adjustment dialog box”

When the user authentication has been specified according to the setting performed at
installation, whether or not the user can change the FNC can be set in the User Utility.
5-24 897N203543D
 FNC
: FNC parameter adjustment area

 [FNC]: ON or OFF
 [FFC]: F or G (common for DR/CR images), H or N (for CR images)
 [FNB]: A to G (7 types)
 [FNT]: A to C (3 types)
 [FNE]: 0.0 to 1.0 (the first decimal place)
To switch FNC processing on or off, select the ON/OFF button.
 See “Chapter 3 Image Processing Parameters” in “Console
Advance Image Processing Parameters” for details.

The FNC processing results will not be reflected on the display image.
(2) After changing each values, select or .
 CRF
: CRF parameter adjustment area (for DR images)

 [CRF]: ON or OFF
 [CRFT]: A to Z (26 types)
To switch CRF processing on or off, select the ON/OFF button.

The changed values are reflected in the displayed image.
Note
 When the selenium panel and the “CHEST,PNEUMOCONIOSIS” exposure menu are
used, be sure to set the CRFT setting to [F].
897N203543D 5-25
5.4.6 Marker/Annotation Settings

Graphical markers and annotations (text markers) can be pasted to displayed images.
(1) Select to display the “Marker/Annotation Settings dialog box”.
“Marker/Annotation Settings dialog box”
: Graphical marker dialog box display button
: Annotation dialog box display button
5-26 897N203543D
 Graphical marker settings

Paste a graphical marker to a displayed image.
(1) Select from to .
“Graphical Marker Settings dialog box”

If you select the desired marker and then specify the desired position to attach the marker, the
marker will be added to the image.
To rotate the marker, select the marker and select one of the following icons.

: Reverses the marker vertically.
: Rotates the marker 90 degrees to left.
Note
 When inputting a marker on a flipped image, make sure that the marker does not overlap
the flip marker.
The text and background colors at the time of marker input can be set in the User Utility.
To change the text and background colors of the marker you input, keep the marker selected,
and then select any of the icons below.
: White characters/black background
: White characters/transparent background
: Black characters/white background
: Black characters/transparent background
897N203543D 5-27
To specify an auto-inputting marker, select a marker and then select one of the following icons.
: The specified marker is automatically applied.
To delete a marker, select one of the following icons.
: Deletes all markers.
: Deletes selected markers.
(2) After completing marker input, select or .
(3) Selecting or saves annotations input at the “Annotation Settings

box” and closes the “Graphical Marker Settings box”.
When the exposure menus are changed or the image switching is performed after the marker
input, the marker is erased.
Note
 Identification marker that is displayed in a copied image and flip marker that is displayed
when an image was flipped cannot be deleted.
 Make also sure that the marker is correctly displayed on the monitor. The marker frame is
displayed only on the monitor, not on the image output on film. Note that the marker may
become invisible depending on the color of its character or background.
 When inputting markers on a stitched image, do not allow them to overlap the joint marker.
 Note that if you set the auto-marker on the edge of the trimming area, the marker may
move out of the trimming area due to the auto-positioning of mammographic image.
 Note that after rotating or flipping the image, the marker will be in the same position or
move. This depends on the settings at the time of installation. In the setting to display the
marker in the same position, if you set the marker on the edge of the trimming area, the
marker may move out of the trimming area due to rotation or flipping of the image.
5-28 897N203543D
<If you choose the setting to hold the marker position>

A marker’s relative position for a trimming frame remains same along with the center of graphical
marker.
Center of graphical marker
Image
Trimming frame
P A Marker
Rotates the image 90 degrees to left.
P A
Flips the image horizontally.
P A
897N203543D 5-29
 Annotation settings
Paste annotations to a displayed image.
Please note that artifacts may appear around the annotation characters input on images due to
frequency processing when those images are displayed or output on film by other devices.
Annotations can be preset in advance using the User Utility.
(1) Select .
“Annotation Settings box”
[Font size]: Specifies the font size.

[Minimum]/[Small]/[Medium]/[Large]/[Maximum]
Displays the previous/next page of presets.
/ :
If you select the desired annotation from those that are preset and then specify the desired
position to attach the annotation, the annotation will be added to the image.
The DICOM tag can be set as an annotation.
 “9.3.9 Text Maker Preset Setting”
The text and background colors at the time of annotation input can be set in the User Utility.
To change the text and background colors of the annotation you input, keep the annotation
selected, and then select any of the icons below.
: White characters/black background
: White characters/transparent background
: Black characters/white background
: Black characters/transparent background
5-30 897N203543D
To delete an annotation, select one of the following icons.
: Deletes all annotations.
: Deletes selected annotations.
(2) After completing annotation input, select or .
(3) Selecting or saves markers input at the “Graphical Marker

Settings box” and closes the “Annotation Settings box”.
If the exposure menu is changed or the image is switched for an image with input annotations,
the input annotations are erased.
You can also type in any text or a line feed in the input box to add arbitrary annotations to the
image.
When no specific position is determined for input of annotation characters, the annotation will be
input at the center of the image.
If a software keyboard appears when the text entry field is focused, which depends on the setting
at the time of installation, an annotation is entered onto the top of the image.
The annotation character can be moved after inputting.
To edit annotations, keep the desired annotation selected and change the text in the input box.
Note
 Do not input user-defined characters. If such characters are input, they may be converted
into asterisks and then displayed.
 If you input “&A” in an annotation, only “A” may appear. To display an ampersand, input it

twice and then “A” (&&A).
 When inputting an annotation on a flipped image, make sure that the annotation does not
overlap the flip marker.
 When inputting annotations on a stitched image, do not allow them to overlap the joint
marker.
 The marker input in the marker input box cannot be deleted with the use of the deletion
icon available in the “Annotation Setting box”. Delete it in the “Marker Setting box”.
Equally, the annotation characters input in the “Annotation Setting box” cannot be deleted
with the use of the deletion icon available in the “Marker Setting box”. Delete them in the
“Annotation Setting box”.
 When the exposure menus are changed or the image switching processing is performed
after annotation characters have been input on one image, those characters are erased.
 Input an annotation far enough away from the region of interest, such as at a corner of the
image.
897N203543D 5-31
 If an image is rotated or reversed, the related annotation characters will also be rotated or
reversed consequently, though the character display direction remains unchanged, as
illustrated below.
Start point
Annotation characters
Image
PATIENT
Rotates the marker 90 degrees to left.
PATIENT
Flips the image horizontally.
PATIENT
 Annotation characters are output printed on film. If you do not wish to output annotation
characters printed on film when images are delivered, contact our official dealer.
5-32 897N203543D
5.4.7 Blackening Processing Settings

The blackening processing can be set manually.
(1) Select to display the “Blackening Processing Settings dialog box”.
“Blackening Processing Settings dialog box”
[Input Polygonal Region.]:

Determines the blackening processing area by inputting the apex (clicking
desired several points) in the image display area.
A polygon is formed by overlapping the final apex and start point.
The button remains pressed down until the polygon is formed.
A maximum of 64 points (64 corners) can be specified for a polygon.
After selecting the polygon region, click any apex or line. (● mark appears on
the apex)
The apex can be moved by clicking the ● mark to be corrected and then clicking
the desired location.
[Input Rectangular Region.]:
Determines the blackening processing area of the rectangle by selecting two
apexes in the image display area.
The button remains pressed down until the rectangle is formed.
After selecting the rectangular region, click any apex or line. (● mark appears on
the apex)
The apex can be moved by clicking the ● mark to be corrected and then clicking
the desired location.
[Deleting one of the input points.]:
Deletes the last point input.
897N203543D 5-33
[Deleting all input points.]:

Deletes all points that have been input.
The target for deletion is input points and the manual blackening processing
area in the Preview.
[Clear preview]:
Deletes all specified blackening processing areas.
The target for deletion is input points, manual blackening processing areas, and
automatic blackening processing areas.
By selecting , you can preview the image that the blackened area has been
cleared. By selecting [Apply] during preview display, the clearing of the
blackened area is confirmed. By selecting again without selecting [Apply],
preview display is cancelled.
[Invert the region (outside)]:
Determines whether to perform blackening processing inside or outside
specified apexes.
At start, the setting is always to perform blackening processing outside.
Every time the button is pressed, the setting toggles between inside and
outside.
When the button is raised, the setting is outside.
When the button is pressed down, the setting is inside.
[Preview]:
Blackens part of the image display area according to the specified apexes.
When multiple blackening processing areas specified, all are colored black.
Each time the button is pressed, the setting is toggled between black display
and framed display.
When the button is raised, the setting is framed display.
When the button is pressed down, the setting is black display.
[Reduce the Tree Structure]:
Reduces the displayed image based on the center area of the display. The
reduction ratio is 100/110.
Each time the button is pressed, the setting toggles between reduction/clear
reduction (110/100 applied).
[Automatic shuttering processing]:
 Displays [ON] when automatic blackening processing is in effect.
 Displays [OFF] when automatic blackening processing is not in effect.
(2) After completing the blackening processing settings, select or .
5-34 897N203543D
5.4.8 Trimming Settings

Trimming adjustment and arbitrary angle rotation of the image can be performed.
If the user authentication is enabled at the time of installation, whether or not each user can use
this function can be specified in the User Utility.
(1) Select to display the “Trimming Settings dialog box”.

To change the trimming size, select one of the following icons.
(2) After the trimming and image angle adjustments, select or .

“Trimming Settings dialog box”
 Trimming adjustment
The trimming size and reference position can be adjusted.
: Trimming size selection button
: Recalculates the trimming area and sets the trimming frame.
: Does not set a trimming frame.
Rotates the trimming frame 90° each time the trimming frame rotation
:
button is selected.
The rotational center is the center coordinate of the trimming frame.
897N203543D 5-35
Moves the trimming frame up/down/left/right buttons

: Press the trimming frame up/down/left/right buttons to move the
trimming frame.
When a button is held down, the frame moves continuously.
Image density optimization button
:
Performs window processing for changed trimming areas.
Performs EDR using data of the specified trimming area.
Performs window processing using the acquired window value, and
displays the result.
Also, the size can be changed by selecting the four corners of the trimming frame and moving
up, down, left or right.
Furthermore, the size can be changed even when the four corners of the trimming frame are
selected and moved up-down and left-right as is.
Note
 Trimming processing is not available for the images below, even if the size of a read image
is the same as that of the image before it has been subjected to trimming processing as
specified in the “Trimming size field”.
- Images read from the FCR 5000 series at standard density
- Composed images or source images for composition
- Some of the images read in FR mode
 When the trimming frame is set up beyond the image before it has been subjected to
trimming processing, areas that are beyond the image will be painted black when it is
output. Note that the result of image processing will not be yielded as specified when the
image is re-output from any external devices that include image display unit.
 Modifying an exposure menu or replacing an image after image trimming processing will
retain the trimming setting determined before such a change, resulting thus in disabling re-
trimming processing at initial menu setting after such a change.
 The image trimmed by selecting appears larger than the default size or
actual trimming size on the screen. The applied trimming size is displayed in either of the
following forms at the bottom of the exposure menu.
Size only:
Default trimming size.
5-36 897N203543D
Size + *:
Non-default trimming size. The smallest size that the trimmed region can fit
in is shown.
The hide/show display of this form depends on the setting at the time of
installation. Moreover, if the trimming frame's long side exceeds 17 inches,
"*" will not be displayed and the size will be notated in inch increments.
 If you change or cancel the trimming settings for images to which the auto mammography
image positioning has been applied, the applied auto-positioning is cancelled.
 To images rotated by an arbitrary angle, image density optimization function cannot be
applied.
 In order to trim with sizes larger than 17" x 17", or sizes other than the default size,
settings at the time of installation are necessary.
 Rotating the image by an arbitrary angle
(1) Select to rotate the image by an arbitrary angle in two ways of operation.
To use this function, settings at installation are needed.
The image is rotated using the central coordinate of the image as a reference point.
The current angle of rotation is displayed on the right of . The displayed angle is
the angle that you rotated the image by an arbitrary angle using this function, and not the angle
of rotating 90 degrees to left, 180 degrees, 90 degrees to right, or reversing left-right or up-down.
(2) To end the rotation, select again.

Note
 If you rotate the image by an arbitrary angle, the image before and after the rotation may
be viewed differently since pixels are interpolated.
 When an arbitrary angle is 0, 90, 180 or 270 degree(s), pixels are not interpolated.
 The following operations reset the adjusted angle.
- Rotating 90 degrees to left, 180 degrees, 90 degrees to right, or reversing vertically or
horizontally
- Changing exposure menus
- Switching images
 Images for ROI measurement are not supported by this function.
 The blank area at the border of the image generated by rotation is filled with the density
set at [Various Fill Density] in the User Utility.
Before rotation After rotation (unfilled) After rotation (filled)
897N203543D 5-37
Rotating the image by specifying two points

When you click the two points on the image, the image is rotated so that the two points are linear
with the first one up and second one down.
Right after clicking the second point on the image, image rotation starts.
Rotating the image by dragging the mouse

When you move the mouse cursor to arbitrary location on the image and then drag the mouse,
the image is rotated synchronously with the mouse.
5-38 897N203543D
5.4.9 Auto-positioning of Mammographic Images

The right and left mammographic images shown on the screen can be positioned automatically.
If they are already positioned, its auto-positioning setting can be cancelled.
(1) Select to show the “Mammography Image Positioning Setting dialog box”.
“Mammography Image Positioning Setting dialog box”

: Performs the auto-positioning.
: Cancels the auto-positioning.
 “4.2.7 Mammography Image Positioning”
(2) After selecting the icon, click or .
5.4.10 Image Stitching Settings

The composition of long-view images can be adjusted.
5.4.11 Measurement
The distance between two points or the angle between two line segments on a captured image
can be measured. To use this function, the settings at the time of installation are required.
Up to 16 measurements totaling the distance and angle measurement can be performed.
Note
 Use the distance or angle measurement results for reference only, and do not use for
diagnosis.
 Judge the measurement results at user’s own risk.
897N203543D 5-39
 The SOPInstanceUID is issued according to the default settings every time when
“Measurement window” is displayed. If images are continuously output with “Measurement
window” displayed, the images are outputted with the same SOPInstanceUID.
 The measurements cannot be saved. The measurements are discarded when
“Measurement window” is closed.
(1) Select to display the “Measurement window”.
2 3 4
1 Side bar
2 Magnification ratio display area
3 Image display area
4 Function button
Selecting this button displays the same menus as those displayed when the mouse is
right-clicked.
This section describes the side bar.
[Storage]:
Outputs the image being displayed to the selected destination. Selects the AE
name of the storage.
Select “-----” if no data is output to the storage.
Note
 The FUJIFILM-original format (PrivateUnstandardizedCRStorage) is not listed in the
dropdown list.
 When pre-processing image is output from the Console, the image processing will be
applied at the destination and artifacts may appear on the peripheries of the
measurements. Therefore, do not select the destinations which are to output the pre-
processing image.
5-40 897N203543D
[Print]:
Outputs the image being displayed to the selected destination in one-image
format. The number of prints is 1 image. Selects the AE name of a destination to
print.
Select “-----” if no data is printed.
[Format]:
Values of the drawing setting are applied only to measurements being selected
(under measurement)
 [Line color]: Selects [Black] or [White].
 [Line style]: Selects [Continuous] or [Dash].
 [Line width]: Selects [Thin], [Normal], or [Thick].
 [Font size]: Selects [Small], [Medium], or [Large].
[Output]:
Displays “Output confirmation dialog box”.

[OK]:
Outputs the measured image, closes “Dialog box”, and then
returns to “Measurement window”.
[Cancel]:
Closes “Output confirmation dialog box” and returns to
“Measurement window”.
Note
 The measurement results will be output when it is displayed to fit in window display.
 The images which were output from the “Measurement window” will not be output at the
times following the automatic distributions. In addition, images will not be output even if the
output destination for the automatic distribution differs from that of the output destination
from the “Measurement window”.
 When stitched long-view images are output, only 14” x 17” size reduced images will be
output. Neither 14” x 17” size reduced images nor life size images will be output at the
times following the automatic distributions. To output life size images redistribute the
images via the “Image Edit screen”. Also, output images from the “Measurement window”
after life size images have been output via the automatic distribution.
 The measurements which are embedded in the images by the storage and film print
outputs are displayed as thorough referential information. Note that the users are
responsible for interpreting the measurements.
897N203543D 5-41
Note
 After the “Measurement window” has appeared, the zoom level of the displayed image in
relation to the image’s actual size is shown in the magnification ratio display area.
 You can move the position within the image display area by dragging the label that shows
measurements.
 If the following message appears after the “Measurement window” is displayed, set the
film format of the target image to one-image format or two-image format.
 Distance measurement between two points

Right-click the mouse or select the function button at the right bottom on the screen and select
“Distance measurement” from the displayed pop-up menu.
Then, the cursor changes to .
Measuring the Distance between Two Points on an Image

Position the cursor on the image, and then left-click the mouse to set the starting point.
Afterwards, when you move the mouse while keeping the button pressed, the distance from the
starting point to the cursor is displayed and updated.
Release the button to set the ending point. The distance between the two points is displayed.
The distance value is displayed to the second decimal place. (The third place is rounded.)
Due to the size of the pixels and the width of the measurement lines, perfect measurement
results are not guaranteed.
The measurement accuracy has been confirmed for the ±1 mm (0.04 in.) image on this device.
The length on the image will slightly different from the length of the actual body depends on the
exposure situation.
This difference is caused by the distance between the actual body and the detector.
Please consider these differences included in the images.
For example, if the distance between the detection plane and the actual body is 5 cm.
 The measurement result is 2.8% larger than the actual body for the upright position (SID 180
cm)
 The measurement result is 5.2% larger than the actual body for the table position
(SID 100 cm)
5-42 897N203543D
*The above differences are examples, and the difference may increase or decrease depending
on the coordinates and length to be measured.
Note
 The unit of distance is mm or inch, depending on the settings at the time of installation.
 If, while pressing down the left button, you move the cursor outside of the image display
area and then release the button, the line segment that is set will consist of the part that
lies within the image display area.
If, however, you have magnified the image until it appears larger than the image display
area, then the line segment extends outside of the image display area.
When the cursor moves outside of the image display area, it changes to .
 The distance between two points is measured on the image projected on the Flat Panel

Detector (FPD)/Device IP.
 If the magnification ratio is acquired from the exposure result, the image is corrected using
the magnification ratio. After corrected, “#” appears after the displayed unit.
Moving a Line Segment

A specific line segment can be moved to any location.
Move the cursor on the line segment to be moved.
When you do this, the cursor changes to .
Press and hold down the left button of the mouse and move the cursor. The line segment moves
along with it.
At this time, the starting and ending points of the line segments change as shown in the figure
below.
After you moved the line segment to the desired location, click any place other than the line to
finalize the position.
897N203543D 5-43
Note
 A line segment cannot be moved outside the image.
 The line segment position is not finalized merely by releasing the left button. To finalize the
position, you must click the mouse at a place other than the line segment.
Moving the Starting and Ending Points of a Line Segment

The starting point or ending point of a specific line segment can be moved to any location.
Move the cursor on the line segment whose starting point or ending point is to be moved, and
then left-click the mouse. The shape of the starting point or ending point changes.
Move the cursor on the starting point or ending point, and then press and hold down the left
button. When you move the cursor, the starting point or ending point moves along with it. As you
move the cursor, the distance between the two points is constantly updated.
Release the button and click at a place other than the line segment. The new position of the
starting point or ending point is finalized.
5-44 897N203543D
Deleting a Line Segment

A specific line segment can be deleted.
Move the cursor on the line segment to be deleted, right-click the mouse or select the function
button at the right bottom on the screen and select [Delete] from the displayed pop-up menu.
The line segment is deleted.
When using the mouse When using the function button
 Angle measurement between two line segments


“Calculate Angle” from the displayed pop-up menu.
Then, the cursor changes to .
Measuring the angle between two line segments on an image

Draw 2 line segments on an image arbitrarily, and measure the angle between them.
Left-click the mouse to set the starting point on an image. After moving the cursor while keeping
the button pressed, release the mouse button to set the ending point.
Repeat this process to draw the second line segment, and the angle between the two line
segments will be shown.
The angle value is displayed to the first decimal place. (The second place is rounded.)
Due to the size of the pixels and the width of the measurement lines, perfect measurement
results are not guaranteed.
The measurement accuracy has been confirmed for the ±1° image on this device.
897N203543D 5-45
Note
 If an intersection point is outside the screen, the angle between the extended lines outside
the screen is shown.
Regarding line segments or moving the starting/ending points of a line segment, see
“Moving a Line Segment” or “Moving the Starting and Ending Points of a Line Segment”.
Regarding line segment deletion, see “Deleting a Line Segment”.
 Image Operations
Functions are provided, which allow you to manipulate the displayed image in various ways,
including image magnification and reduction.
These menus are accessed through a pop-up menu. Right-click the mouse or select the function
button at the right bottom on the screen and select the desired menu from the displayed pop-up
menu.
You can identify the currently selected menu by the cursor display.
 See each section for a respective cursor.
The currently selected menu is also indicated in the pop-up menu by a check mark on the left-
hand side.
Check mark
5-46 897N203543D
[Image Magnification]
This function magnifies the displayed image.
[Image Magnification] from the displayed pop-up menu. The cursor changes to , a check
mark appears on the left-hand side of [Image Magnification] in the pop-up menu and the image
magnification function is enabled.
Left-click the mouse at a desired place on the image to magnify in that spot. The image is
magnified by each click.
The image can also be magnified by rotating the mouse wheel forward.
The zoom level shown in the magnification ratio display area is updated at this time.
If you right-click the mouse or select the function button at the right bottom on the screen again
and select an item from the pop-up menu other than “Image Magnification”, the image
magnification function is cancelled.
Note
 The magnification level for each mouse click and the maximum magnification level depend
on the settings at the time of installation.
[Image reduction]
This function reduces the displayed image.
[Image reduction] from the displayed pop-up menu. The cursor changes to , a check
mark appears on the left-hand side of [Image reduction] in the pop-up menu and the image
reduction function is enabled.

Left-click the mouse at a desired place on the image to reduce in that spot. The image is reduced
by each click.
The image can also be reduced by rotating the mouse wheel backward.
The zoom level shown in the magnification ratio display area is updated at this time.
and select an item from the pop-up menu other than “Image Reduction”, the image reduction
function is cancelled.
[Move image]
The image can be moved to any position.
There are the following two ways to do this.
<Moving the image while it is magnified or reduced>

The image can be moved while it is magnified or reduced. Press and hold down the left button
of the mouse and move the cursor. The image will move along with it.
The cursor changes to at this time.
If you release the button, the cursor changes back to or and the image
magnification or reduction function is restored.
897N203543D 5-47
<Moving the image through menu selection>

[Move image] from the displayed pop-up menu. The cursor changes to , a check
appears on the left-hand side of [Move image] in the pop-up menu and the image move function
is enabled.
Press and hold down the left button on the mouse and move the cursor. The image will move
along with it.
and select an item from the pop-up menu other than [Move image], the image move function is
cancelled.
The image, however, remains where it has been moved.
[Fit in Window]
The size of the image can be adjusted to fit the image display area.
[Fit in Window] from the displayed pop-up menu. The size of the image is adjusted to fit the image
display area.
If the position of the image becomes unclear, right-click the mouse or select the function button
at the right bottom on the screen and select [Fit in Window] from the pop-up menu.
The function that was being used before you select [Fit in Window] is not cancelled at this time
and remains active.
Ending the measurement

End the measurement function, and return to the “Image Edit window”.
[Exit] from the displayed pop-up menu. The measurement ends, and the “Image Edit window” is
redisplayed.
Note
 Measurement results and line segments cannot be saved.
 Displaying the Version Number

The version number of the measurement function can be displayed.
Right-click on the magnification ratio display area to display the pop-up menu. Select “Version”
to display the “Version information window”.
Confirm the version number and then select [OK] to close the “Version information window”.
5-48 897N203543D
 Backup and Restore of the Setting Information
Backup
This section describes how to create a backup copy of the setting information of the
measurement function.
Perform backup periodically as a precaution against the loss of data in case that the setting file
is damaged. The backed-up information is used for restoring the setting file.
 “Restore”
(1) Start up the User Utility of the Console.
(2) Select [Ascent View].
(3) Select [Backup].

(4) Select the backup destination drive and folder,
and then [OK].
897N203543D 5-49
(5) Select [OK].
(6) Select [OK].
Note
 In case that the operating system is Windows Vista or Windows 7, if a previous backup file
already exists in the backup destination folder, the dialog box below appears. Do not
select “Copy, but keep both files”. Otherwise, the data will not be restored properly.
Restore
This section describes how to restore the backed-up setting information of the measurement
function.
Use this function to restore the setting information in case that the setting file is damaged.
After restoration has been performed, the setting file is returned to the condition it was in at the
time the data were backed up. Any changes in the data made after the backup was performed
will not be reflected in the file.
Note that restoration is not possible if the current software version is different from the one at the
time of the backup.
(1) Start up the User Utility of the Console.
(2) Select [Ascent View].
5-50 897N203543D
(3) Select [Restore].
(4) Select the drive and the folder where the

backed-up data are stored, and then [OK].
(5) Select [OK].

(6) Select [OK].
897N203543D 5-51
5.4.12 Distribution Settings

The displayed image can be distributed to a printer or a storage device.
Select to display the “Distribution Settings dialog box”. After setting the various items,
select .
 Print output
[Host]: Select the printer to which to distribute the image from a drop-down list.
/ : Sets the number of films to print.
: Configures the advanced print settings.

Selecting displays the “Film Format Change box”.
 See “4.1.9 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Setting the

Multi-frame Format” for the “Film Format Change box”.
 See the “Console Advance Reference Guide (Option)” for the settings of
stitched images.
: Deletes the printer.
Note
 If you change the image format for images to which the auto mammography image
 Storage output
[Host]: Select the server to which to distribute the image from a drop-down list.
/ : Sets the pixel density of the image. Select to set the density to
standard, and to set it to high.
5-52 897N203543D
: Configures the advanced settings for saving stitched images.

: Deletes the server.
Select to complete the settings.
Select to cancel the setup and close the screen.
5.4.13 Exposure List

A list of exposures can be confirmed for each study.
Select to display the “Exposure List dialog box”.

“Exposure List dialog box”
It is possible to change the order of the exposure menus, and switch the thumbnail images.
 See “4.1.4 Preparation before Exposure (Image Reading): Changing the Order of
Exposure Menus” and “4.2.2 Switching Images” for details.
897N203543D 5-53
5.4.14 QA Main
The QA main screen can be displayed.
Select to display the “QA Main screen”.
“QA Main screen”
5.4.15 QA All Menu

The “QA All Menu screen” can be displayed.
Select to display the “QA All Menu screen”.
“QA All Menu screen”
5-54 897N203543D
5.4.16 Finalizing and Suspending Image Edits

Whether to finalize or suspend the edits to the image can be selected.
To finalize your edits, select . The study is added to the “Finish QA list”.
To suspend your edits, select . The study is added to the “Waiting QA list”.
“QA Main screen”

Note
 The User Utility can be used to finalize image edits automatically.
 When a dose control system is connected to the Console, exposure result information is
sent to the system at the time of finalizing image edits.
897N203543D 5-55
5.5 Editing Patient Information

Patient information can be edited.
installation, the permission to use this function can be set to each user in the User Utility.
(1) Select to display the “Patient Information Input box”.
(2) After modifying information items as necessary, select .
However, patient information cannot be edited on the “Image Edit screen” during the study. To
modify patient information, return to the “Study screen” and then select (x) again.
 “3.1.3 Modifying Patient Information”
Note
 When editing the patient information in the order received from a RIS terminal, the
following message may appear.
After reading the displayed message, select to close the “Patient Information Input
box”.
5-56 897N203543D
5.6 Using Utility (QA Image Controller Buttons)

This section explains how to operate various utility functions.
Perform these operations accordingly.
The Using Utility (QA Image Controller Buttons) displayed in “Image Edit screen” are as follows:
 Overlay display of exposure results information
 Magnification display
 Moving image
 Zoom in
 Zoom out
 Actual-size display
 1-to-1 pixel-size display
 Window-fit display
 Full-screen display
 Changing image processing parameters
 Mis-exposure settings
 Outputting to a print device
 Distributing to a storage device
 Starting up the Image Browse Software
 Locking study
 Sending back the study
Property of the QA image control buttons can be set at [User Utility].
1
QA image control buttons
897N203543D 5-57
5.6.1 Magnifying Display Image

The displayed image can be magnified. Note, however, that the result of magnified display will
not be reflected on output images.
(1) Select .
The magnifying function palette is displayed.
(2) Perform necessary processing using each tool, and then select .
 Activating the image move mode
Select . The relevant button will be activated.

Press and hold the left button of the mouse over an image, and then move the mouse in any
direction to move the image.
Selecting again will change the system to the routine mode .

When trimming processing is in process, the frame used for this processing is changed. While
in marker or annotation character input processing, the selected marker or annotation character
position is moved.
Note that no action will be taken as is not selectable when a setting box other than trimming
processing or marker or annotation character input is displayed.
 Zoom-in
Select .
By selecting an arbitrary position in the image display field, the image is zoomed in with the
selected position to be its center.
 Zoom-out
Select .
By selecting an arbitrary position in the image display field, the image is zoomed out with the
selected position to be its center.
5-58 897N203543D
 Actual-size display
Select .
Displays an image in the same size as that recorded on the IP.
Note
 In this mode, DR exposure images (SID=100 cm (39.4 in.)) are displayed as follows.
- The upright images are displayed about 5% larger than the actual size.
- The supine images are displayed about 10% larger than the actual size.
 This function should be used on the understanding of this fudge factor.
 1-to-1 pixel-size display
Select .
The image is displayed in the condition that one pixel of the original image equals one pixel on
the display.
 Window-fit display
Select .
The image is displayed in proper size for the image display field.
 Full-screen display
Select .

The image is displayed in the full-screen size image display field.
To release the full screen display option, select again.
 Edge highlighting
Select .
The image outline is highlighted.
Select again to cancel the edge highlighting.
897N203543D 5-59
5.6.2 Changing Parameters

Application of the target image processing parameter can be changed.
Select .
Changes to the image processing parameter for the left (rendered as in S/F)
:
image in the two image format.
Changes to the image processing parameter for the right image in the two
:
image format.
: Changes to the image processing parameter for one image format.
5-60 897N203543D
5.6.3 Result Data Overlay Display

Exposure result information can be overlaid in the image display field of the “Study screen” and
“Image Edit screen”. This result data overlay display is a function to display the exposure result
data items overlapped with the read image. Selecting alternately turns on and off overlay
mode of the exposure result data. If the displayed image becomes difficult to view while this
functions is used, select to turn on and off overlay mode.
Note
 The EI/DI values are not shown on the mammography image.
Exposure result display field

 Items displayed in overlay mode are as follows:
- Tube voltage: By 1kV
- X-ray exposure dose: By 0.1mAs
- Target element/filter element: Mo/Mo, Mo/Rh, or W/Rh (no unit)
- Grid: IN or OUT (no unit)
- Focal spot size: Large or Small (no unit)
- Breast thickness: By 1mm
- Compression force: By 0.1N
- Angle: By 1°
- AEC: Auto or Manual (no unit)
- View Code Sequence + View Modifier Code Sequence: No unit
- Average glandular dose: By 0.01mGy
- Entrance skin exposure: By 0.01mGy
- Image laterality: L, R, or B (no unit)
- Patient orientation: Row or Column (no unit)
- GA/GS: No unit
- S/L: No unit
- EI/DI: No unit
- GPR: No unit
- Trimming Size: No unit
- Detector Description: No unit
- Detector ID: No unit
897N203543D 5-61
- MG Positioning: Active/inactive the auto mammography image positioning (no unit)
Note
 For GPR, even if the exposure parameter has been set to GPR=ON, OFF will be displayed
when no grid was detected.
Exposure result data items to be displayed in overlay mode can be set in the User Utility.
 “Chapter 9 User Utility Operations”
Note
 The overlay display may become difficult to view by adjusting image processing
parameters. In such a case, use the study information list function and check the result
information.
5.6.4 Locking Study Data

The currently displayed study can be locked to prevent it from being deleted.
Select . Select the icon again to release the lock. A study that has been locked will be
displayed with at the “Lock” item of the study list (QA/Delivered/Today/All).
Note
 Make sure that the Console Advance has enough hard disk space. The Console Advance
hard disk is not for storing diagnostic images. When the Console Advance hard disk space
is running low, images will be automatically deleted from the oldest. The auto-deletion of
images can be avoided by locking studies.
5.6.5 Outputting and Distributing an Image

The currently displayed image can be output to a printer or distributed to a storage device.
Select to output the image to a printer, and to distribute it to a storage device.
The parameters for outputting and distributing images are as set in the “Distribution Settings
dialog box”.
 “5.4.12 Distribution Settings”
Note
 When a dose control system is connected to the Console, exposure result information is
sent to the system at the time of outputting the image to a printer or distributing it to a
storage device.
 An automatically or manually trimmed image is printed out in the trimmed size. Note that
areas outside of the default size image will be blackened when printing.
 The image of 24cm x 30cm is printed on a B4 or 14” x 17”-sized film with 100% size. If
both sizes of films are loaded in a printer, the B4 film is prioritized when printing.
 When delivering images to the storage device in FUJIFILM standard format, the trimming
data is delivered together with images received from the exposure unit. Also, images taken
by using the flat panel sensor are delivered without changing their image size.
5-62 897N203543D
5.6.6 Setting Mis-exposed Images

The currently displayed image can be handled as a mix-exposure image. The images handled
as mis-exposed ones cannot be output to external devices.
Select . Select the icon again to release the mis-exposed status.

Depending on the settings at the time of installation, the “Mis-exposure Cause Input box” will be
displayed when is selected.
 “4.4.1 Re-exposure”
Note
 If you change the mis-exposure image setting for the images to which the auto-positioning
of left and right breast images has been applied, the applied auto-positioning is cancelled.
 When editing an image during a study, the mis-exposure image setting cannot be changed
on the “Image Edit screen”. After returning to the “Study screen”, change the mis-exposure
image setting.
5.6.7 Sending back the study

The currently displayed study can be added to the “Waiting Study list”.
Select .
5.6.8 Starting up the Image Browse Software

Image Browse Software can be started up.
Select .
897N203543D 5-63
5.7 QA Reset
The edit results for image information can be reset for the time the image editing started.
Select .
Exposure menus for the image editing in progress can be reset.
Note
 The following operations save all results to have been edited.
 Selecting does not return the image to the state before saving the results.
- Changing exposure menus
- Redoing blackening processing
- Trimming adjustment
- Long-view exposure image stitching (auto and manual stitching)
- Mammography image positioning and canceling
 After these operations, continue image editing and select to reset to the state right
after the above operations.
5-64 897N203543D
5.8 Completing Image Edit

This section explains how to complete the editing of image information.
The following operation finishes image editing.

When other image (study) is displayed and editing image is finished, the setting is saved
automatically.
Select or . The edit of image information is completed.
Note
 The setting will be saved automatically when either of changing exposure menus,
alternately switching images or outputting/distributing an image is performed.
 It is also possible to configure so that a confirmation box appears when the setup data is
saved automatically.
897N203543D 5-65
5-66 897N203543D
Chapter
6 List Operation
6.1 List
This section explains the various lists configuring the initial screen. These lists can be displayed
by selecting the query button at the top area of the screen.
The types of query buttons can be customized. The number of studies and information items to
display can also be set. General query buttons are positioned in the five spots to the left of the
study list query buttons. [RIS] is positioned as the rightmost button. [RIS] is allocated if the MWM
option is installed.
 “6.2 List Operation” - “ Study list query and study list settings”
 Items displayed the list
1 4

2 5
3 6
1 Query buttons
Selects the type of list. (Screenshot of standard situation)
2 Study list
Displays information by the study.
897N203543D 6-1
3 Study selection position display field

Displays the number of the study selected in the list / the total number of studies.
4 Study list command buttons
Performs outputs and deletions.
5 Exposure list
The exposure menus, images and mis-exposure status for the selected study are
displayed.
6 Connected devices status display field
Displays the status of connected devices.
 Names and functions of buttons
Study reception button Displays the “Patient Information Input screen”.
Display button for study Displays the command list for the study list.
list command, etc
File output button Outputs the files (PDI output) of the studies selected
in the study list.
Batch distribution button Outputs the studies selected in the study list as a
batch.
Image Browse Software Starts up the Image Browse Software.
button
Delete study button Deletes the study selected in the study list. You can
also delete a study as follows: After selecting a study,
right-click the mouse, and then select [Delete] from
the menu that appears.
Free layout print button Starts up the Free Layout Print Software.
Study list customization Displays the “Study List Settings dialog box”. Use this
button dialog box to rename the list, or configure the
information items to display.
Update button Updates the study list and displays the latest
information.
Quick Start button The patient information and the Exposure menu are
automatically registered according to the settings of
the User Utility.
If the number of registrations is only one, the Study
screen directly appears, and if two or more, the Study
screen appears through the Menu selection screen.
Lock button Locks the currently displayed study to prevent it from
being deleted. You can also lock a study as follows:
After selecting a study, right-click the mouse, and
then select [Lock] from the menu that appears.
Study restart button Starts the currently selected study again.
6-2 897N203543D
QA force-quit button Changes the study status from “Waiting QA” to

“Finish QA”.
RIS search conditions Displays the “RIS Search Conditions screen”.
button
Study pending button Suspends all tests obtained from the host units at
once.
Clear search conditions Clears the search conditions entered in the
button information item entry fields.
12 on 1 button Outputs images for the studies whose image editing
is in the waiting state or completed in the medical
examination format. (Outputs 12 frames on a 14” x
17” image.)
Image move button Moves images to other study or series.
Tool button Displays the tool menu.
Order information Displays the “Order Information Confirmation

confirmation button screen”.
Excute button Proceeds to the next processing stage for the study
selected on the study list. The “Study screen” or
“Image Edit screen” appears, depending on the
current status of the study. You can also execute a
study or edit an image as follows: After selecting a
study, right-click the mouse, and then select

[Execute] from the menu that appears.
Exposure list page up/ Scrolls the exposure list.
/
down buttons
Study list page up/down Displays the previous/next page of the study list.
/
buttons
897N203543D 6-3
 Icon names
Study queue status icon Appears for studies with non-terminated exposures.
QA queue status icon Appears for studies with terminated exposures but
non-terminated image editing (QA).
QA queue status Appears for studies with terminated exposures but
(decision pending) icon non-terminated image editing (QA) and which are
suspended.
QA completion status Appears for studies with terminated exposures and
icon image editing (QA), but non-terminated output.
Smart-QA warning icon Appears for a study whose Smart-QA analysis result
is “confirmation required”.
Patient comment icon Appears for studies with a patient comment entered
on the “Patient Information Input screen”.
Contraindicated status Appears for studies with information on
icon contraindication entered on the “Patient Information
Input screen”.
Delete lock icon Appears for studies that cannot be deleted.
Unconfirmed image icon Appears for studies that contain one or more
unconfirmed images.
There are the following five types of study lists.
Waiting Study list Displays information on studies that have been received, but for
which exposure is not terminated.
Waiting QA list Displays information on studies for which exposures have been
performed but image editing (QA) has not yet.
Finish QA list Displays information on studies for which both exposures and image
editing (QA) have been performed.
All list Displays information on all studies registered on the hard disk of the
equipment.
Today list Displays information on all studies received today.
Note
 The study lists above are set by default.
6-4 897N203543D
6.2 List Operation

Described herein are operations of the lists.
 Filtering
Study information in the Console can be filtered.
Filtering can be performed for each study list.
Input keywords in the input field of the information items, and then press Enter key. The study
information that corresponds to the keywords will be listed up.
For the filtering operation

 Upper case/lower case is not distinguished for keywords.
 The study information listed up is forward-corresponded to the keywords input in [Patient's
Name] / [Study Menu Name] and completely corresponded to the keywords input in other
keyword items.
 Keywords cannot be input for [Contrast Allergies], [Lock], and [Study Condition].

 If keywords are input in multiple items, the study information is filtered with AND conditions.
 A card reader (optional) can be used to enter keywords in the [Patient ID].
 You can use a barcode reader (optional) to enter keywords for the [Patient ID] or [Accession
No.].
 If only one study is found for the corresponding study information by filtering using the card
reader or barcode reader, the Console selects the study automatically and moves on to next
processing step.
 When the filtering is performed using the card reader or barcode reader immediately after lists
are switched alternately and so on, the existing study information may not be listed up. If this
happens, perform the same filtering again.
 The keywords once input will be kept unless they are deleted. To release all filtering
conditions, select .
 Search
Specific studies can be searched from the list.
The scope of the search is the studies displayed in the current list. Searching can be performed
for each study list.
There are two search methods:
897N203543D 6-5
Search by specifying search conditions

Set the search conditions for each list, and display only the corresponding studies in each list.
 “6.2 List Operation” - “ Study list query and study list settings” - Search settings
Once search conditions have been set, they will apply until the system is shut down or the search
conditions are reset.
Search by entering keywords in the search list

Enter keywords in the “Search Condition Input box” directly below the list items, and press the
[Enter] key on the keyboard. The corresponding studies will be displayed in the list.
Search Condition Input box
 Setting the sorting order

Sorting order of the list can be set.
Sorting can be performed for each study list.
 “6.2 List Operation” - “ Study list query and study list settings” - Sort settings
When one of the items at the top of the study list is selected, the list is sorted by the selected
item. Ascending order and descending order can be switched every time the corresponding item
is selected.
6-6 897N203543D
 Updating the list

The list can be updated to display the latest information. Updating can be performed for each
study list.
Select .
 Deletion
Studies in the list can be deleted.
Deletion can be performed for each study list.
When the user authentication has been specified according to the setting performed at time of
installation, the user is allowed to limit the use of this function.
Select a study, and then select . The study displayed with (lock) cannot be deleted.
The “Confirmation box” is displayed.
Select .
897N203543D 6-7
 Study resumption/QA start

A study can be resumed, or image editing can be started.
These processes can be performed for each study list.
Select a study in the directory by a study level, and then select .
In the case of the “Finish QA list”, you can add exposures to studies as follows. After selecting
the study, right click with the mouse. Then from the menu that appears, select [Add Exposure].
 “4.4.2 Additional Exposure”
Selecting multiple studies and executing study resumption/QA start at the same time
For the “Waiting QA list”, QA processing can be performed if you select multiple studies by the
operation below.
For the “Waiting Study list”, the intended study can be performed if you select multiple studies
by the operation below.
 Selecting ranges for multiple studies at the press of the Shift key
 Selecting ranges for multiple studies by touching those studies on the touch panel
 Selecting ranges for multiple studies at the left-click of those studies
For requirements applied to starting multiple studies at the same time.
 “4.1.2 Starting a Study” - “ Starting studies from the “Waiting Study list”” - When starting
multiple studies at the same time
Note
 When a multiple number of studies are selected on those lists, an icon for the function that
is disabled for the selected studies cannot be selected. If this is the case, select any one of
the studies of those lists to release the selected range and the re-select a study
accordingly.
6-8 897N203543D
 Scroll
Study list and exposure list can be scrolled.
On the study list, select or to display the previous or next page.
On the exposure list, select or to scroll the list.

Alternatively, pages can be scrolled using the scroll bar on the screen.
These icons are displayed only when all the studies cannot be displayed at a time. In other
cases, they are not displayed.
 Study list query and study list settings

The study list can be customized.
Use this to rename the study list or change the display settings of information items.
Customization can be performed for each study list.
Select .
The “Study List Settings (Basic settings) dialog box” is displayed.
“Study List Settings (Basic settings) dialog box”

897N203543D 6-9
There are five setting dialog boxes in the “Study List Settings dialog box”.
[Basic settings]:
Set the name and display on/off, number of items, and updates.
[Search settings]:
Specify the query conditions for each display item.
[Display Setting]:
Specify the items to be displayed in the study list.
[Sort settings]:
Set the display order (sort) conditions from priority 1 to priority 3.
[Shared settings]:
Select the Console that collects study information among the Consoles (up to 8
units) registered at the time of installation with the setting to share study
information.
Basic settings
Select .
The “Study List Settings (Basic settings) dialog box” is displayed.
“Study List Settings (Basic settings) dialog box”
[Query name]:
Enter the query name. (Up to 20 alphabetical or numerical characters can be
entered.)
[Display the query]:
Specify whether to display or hide study lists.
6-10 897N203543D
[Maximum number of display items]:

Specify the number of items to be displayed in the study list.
[Update the display at the time of selecting the query]:
Specify whether to update the display when a query is selected.
[Auto update at regular intervals]:
Specify whether to automatically update after a specific time.
[Auto-update time[min]]:
Specify the automatic update interval.
[Warning on retrieval failure]:
Specify whether to display a warning message when communication with RIS
failed. This setting is exclusively for the [RIS] query.
After making the settings explained below, select .
Search settings
Select .
The “Study List Settings (Search settings) dialog box” is displayed.
“Study List Settings (Search settings) dialog box”
[Study Condition]:
Select the study status to search for from the pull-down menu.
[Study Date]:
From the pull-down menu, select the search date conditions.
897N203543D 6-11
[Modality]:
Enter the search modality.
Display setting
Select .
The “Study List Settings (Display setting) dialog box” is displayed.
“Study List Settings (Display setting) dialog box”

Select the check boxes of items to be displayed.
Without or with image confirmation/Smart-QA Warning/Thumbnail/Patient comments/

Contrast Allergies/Lock/Accession No./Patient’s Name/Patient ID/Birth Date/Sex/Study
Date/Study Time /Number of Images /Study Condition /Host Name /Study ID/Study UID/
Number of Series/Scheduled procedure step description/Technologist Name/Requesting
Department/Study Menu Name/Modality Name/Body Part Examined/Series Instance UID/
Number of Series Images/Menu Name/Image No./SOP Instance UID/Image Size/FCR
image ID
Select or to display the previous or next page.
Select an item from the list and press the button to move the display up one.
Press the button to move the display down one.
6-12 897N203543D
Sort settings
Select .
The “Study List Settings (Sort settings) dialog box” is displayed.
“Study List Settings (Sort settings) dialog box”
[Display order priority] (1/2/3):

Specify sort conditions from first to third priority from the display items. Display

items to be sorted and ascending order and descending order can be specified
for each priority.
897N203543D 6-13
Shared settings
Select .
The “Study List Settings (Shared settings) dialog box” is displayed.
“Study List Settings (Shared settings) dialog box”

The dialog box displays the Consoles (up to 8 units) that were registered at the time of installation
with the setting to share study information.
Click the checkbox of the Console that you wish to collect study information. A checkmark
appears.
After making the settings, select .
The study information in the Console set here is displayed in the study list.
Note
 [Shared settings] is only displayed if the shared study information function was enabled at
the time of installation.
 “6.3 Sharing Study Information between Consoles (Shared Study Information
Function)”
6-14 897N203543D
 Batch delivery
Studies (excluding queued studies) can be delivered as a batch.
In the study list, select the studies to be delivered, and then select .
The “Delivery dialog box” is displayed.
“Delivery dialog box”

Select the destination from the drop-down list, and select .
: Cancels operation.
Note
 If [Distribution setting] is specified, then they are distributed according to that setting.
 “5.4.12 Distribution Settings”
897N203543D 6-15
 Outputting in the medical examination format

Images for multiple studies are output in 12 frames on per 14 x 17 inch film.
To use this function, the settings at the time of installation are required.
This output function is available for the following images.
 Images for studies whose status is “Waiting QA” or “Finish QA”
 Images other than long-view and/or mis-exposure images
Specify the study to be delivered in the study list, and select .

After right-clicking on the study list to display menus and choosing [Select all.], all studies in the
study list are selected.
When is selected, a confirmation message appears.
To cancel the output, select .
 Image move
Moves images to other study or series.
installation, the user is allowed to limit the use of this function.
Note
 Performing the operation using this function will rewrite the important information for
patient and/or study. Be careful to perform this operation and we recommend that you
record operation details accordingly. FUJIFILM shall not be liable for any matters resulting
from this function.
Select .
6-16 897N203543D
Showing/hiding can be specified in the User Utility.
The “Image Move box” is displayed.
897N203543D 6-17
: Filters the study list.
: Releases the filtering for the study list.
: Updates the study list.
: Specifies the image to be moved.
: Moves the image.
: Completes the image move and the box is closed.
/ : Scrolls the study list.
/ : Scrolls to the beginning or the end of the study list.
Moving images
Select twice the study to which the moving image is registered to expand the study directory.
Selecting it once cannot expand the directory.
The studies to be listed up in the study list can be filtered/updated.
 “List Operation” - “ Image move” - Filtering/update of the study list
When you select the image to be moved and then , the image to be moved is specified.
The unread image ([****] display) or the image that is going through the output processing cannot
be specified as the image to be moved.
Same as with the previous procedure, select the moving destination (institution/study/series/
image), and then select to move the image.
6-18 897N203543D
The image cannot be moved to the study that has the unread image ([****] display) or the image
that is going through the output processing. The image before delivery (in “QA” list) cannot be
moved to the study delivered already.
When the institution is selected:

An image will be moved as a new study.
When the study is selected:
An image will be moved as a new series to the selected study.
When the series is selected:
An image will be moved to the selected series.
When the image is selected:
An image will be moved to the series that the selected image is registered.
The image can be moved by a mouse operation, too. Drag and drop the image to move it to the
moving destination.
When you move the image, a confirmation box will appear.

Confirm a message in the box, and then select .
Select to cancel operation.
897N203543D 6-19
Note
 When image move processing is executed, the film format for the image you moved will be
the default format (one-image or right/left two-image format) for the exposure menu. Also,
among images in the study of the image moving source, the same image as the one
moved to the destination will be the default format (one-image or right/left two-image
format) for the exposure menus.
 Exposure result logs, mis-exposure logs and the results of the retake analysis (option) are
not updated after moving the image.
Filtering/update of the study list

Filters/updates the studies to be listed up in the study list.
Filtering
Filters the studies to be listed up in the study list.
Select/input the condition of filtering (study date/patient information), and then . The
study list will be filtered.
To release filtering, select .
Study date filtering

Select one of [Today] / [Past one week] / [Period designation]. When [Period designation] is
selected, input dates for the period (beginning date and ending date). The input format for dates
differs depending on the setting made when the equipment is installed.
Example
> Studies only on January 1, 2013 → From 2013.01.01 / To 2013.01.01
> Studies after January 1, 2013 → From 2013.01.01 / To blank
> Studies before January 1, 2013 → From blank / To 2013.01.01
6-20 897N203543D
Patient information filtering

Select one of [Patient ID] / [Patient name], and input its condition in the [Keyword] field.
When [Patient name] is selected, the character string to be input needs not to equal to actual
character string completely. So, a fuzzy filtering is valid in this case.
Example
> To display all studies whose patient name is “Jones” → Input “Jones”
Update
Updates the information to the latest for the studies to be listed up in the study list.
Select .
When the filtering display is set, studies will be displayed according to its condition.
 Saving the linear images

You can save the images in RAW format.
To use this function, you need to set up the function on installation.
Note
 Images captured with exposure menus with the function (a special processing) set to WS,
ES or TO cannot be saved in RAW format.
On the study list, select a study to save images and then .
Multiple studies can also be selected. To select multiple studies, press and hold the Shift or
Ctrl key and select multiple studies.
The “Saving format specification screen” is displayed. Select “RAW format + image processing
parameters”.
“Saving format specification screen”
897N203543D 6-21
Select on the right side of the “Destination folder” to show “Folder selection dialog box”, and
select a medium and a folder in which images are saved.
The following media and folders can save the images.

 Shared folders on the network
 CD-R, DVD-R or DVD+R inserted in the CD/DVD drive of own housing
 USB-connected HDD or USB memory
Note
 If there are no empty folders, the following error message appears. In this case, select
and then . A folder named with the current year, month, day, hour, minute,
and second is added. Select this newly created folder as the destination folder.
The selected medium and folder are displayed in the “Save Data” field.
Specify the file name and select .
Images in RAW format and image processing parameter file (CSV format) are saved in the
selected destination.
Saving is as follows:
 RAW image:
[Study date and time]_[Specified file name]_[Exposure Menu Name]_[UID].raw
 Image processing parameter file:
[Study date and time]_[Specified file name]_[Exposure Menu Name]_[UID].csv
Note
 UID is a character string whereas the “current date, hours, minutes, seconds + 1/100
seconds” are a value of converted into 1/100 seconds that is formed into a hexatridecimal.
6-22 897N203543D
 If characters and symbols that cannot be used in the file name and the menu name are
used, they are replaced with a space.
897N203543D 6-23
6.3 Sharing Study Information between Consoles (Shared

Study Information Function)
You can share study information between the Consoles by clustering them connected to the
network. This is called the “shared study information function”.
Whether the shared study information function is used or not depends on the settings at the time
of installation.
The shared study information function displays in each list the study information used by the user
in that Console, as well as the study information inside other Consoles. Sharing study
information makes a variety of advanced operations available, such as reserving studies, editing
images, outputting images, and performing other processing from a specific central Console, and
moving study information to a different exposure room during the exposure process (executing
part of the exposures for a study from a different Console).
The Consoles with which to share study information can be specified for each list separately.
 “ Icon names” - “ Study list query and study list settings” - Shared settings
Note
 If a refresh of the study list fails, or the collection of study information from an information
sharing Console fails, then the Console event indicator of the connected devices status
changes to .
 “Chapter 7 Connected Devices Status”

 QA auto-finalization can only be performed on studies on the Console being used by the
user.
 Only orders received by the Console being used by the user are displayed in the “RIS”.
 PDI output can be performed only for the studies stored in the Console currently in use.
Regardless of the output type (single-point output or multi-point output), studies are output
to the medium connected to the Console currently in use.
 The following information needs to be consistent among the Consoles that share study
information.
- Exposure menu setting (exposure menu, study menu and image processing
parameters)
- Table setting (technologist information setting, requesting department information setting
and anatomic region setting)
- Property setting (distribution setting)
 Single-point output
If the shared study information function is enabled, it is possible to centrally output data from
information-sharing Consoles using a single Console.
When a Console is specified as the central-output Console of the Consoles sharing information,
all output from those Consoles must be performed from the specified Console.
Whether integrated output is performed or not depends on the settings at the time of installation.
6-24 897N203543D
 Multi-point output
When sharing study information is registered, disabling the single-point output activates the
printing process controlled by the Console that study information is registered.
Note
 If the film output is performed in the 12 on 1 format, the output processing takes place on a
Console that gives the output instruction.
897N203543D 6-25
6-26 897N203543D
Chapter
7 Connected Devices
Status
7.1 Connected Devices Status

Connected devices status displays the status of the Console and devices connected to it (e.g.
Image Reader and output device). You can use this to check the connection and output status,
and configure the connection with an order issuance device.
7.1.1 Connected Devices Status

The connected devices status appears in the lower right of every window.
Connected devices status

See below for details about each of the connected devices status items displayed.
897N203543D 7-1
(4) (3)
(5)
(1) (2)
(1) Logged in user display area

This shows the currently logged in user name.
Nothing will be displayed if the system was configured beforehand to omit user authentication.
(2) Current time display

This shows the current time.
(3) Image Reader indicator

If messages have been received from the Image Reader, then the latest message will appear.
(4) ShotReady (exposure ready status indicator)

This shows whether exposure (image reading) is possible. Exposure (image reading) can be
performed when the indicator is lit green. Exposure (image reading) cannot be performed when
the indicator is not lit. This icon will not be displayed if an FCR cassette is selected in the
exposure unit display field.
(5) Other indicator icons display area

This shows the status of the Console and connected devices. Up to seven icons can be
displayed. The status of each connected device is shown in three categories.
Device information displayed in each category is as follows.
Category Device information

Status of exposure unit (1) Exposure unit communication indicator
(2) Exposure unit battery indicator
(3) Grid indicator
7-2 897N203543D
Category Device information

Status of the Console and (4) Console event indicator
personal computer (5) Console battery indicator
(6) Console wireless communication indicator
Other (Status of output unit, (7) Order issuance device indicator
hospital LAN, etc.) (8) XCON indicator
(9) Output status indicator
(10) Wireless communication status indicator
(11) Starting the General RIS Browser Software
The information is displayed in each category as shown below.
1 Device information of the category

2 Category
Locations of category information can be customized in the user utility.

 Exposure Unit Communication Indicator

The following icons display communication status of the exposure unit corresponding to the
selector selected in the exposure unit display field of the “Study screen”.
If the device has a wired connection, the following icons are displayed.
: Connected

: Unknown
If the device is connects wirelessly, the following icons are displayed.
/ / / : Connected. Displays the signal strength in four levels.
/ : Disconnected
: Unknown
Note
 When using the flat panel sensor that supports extra sleep mode, bear the followings in
mind.
- While extra sleep mode is enabled, the icon that shows as disconnected is displayed.
- It takes approximately 30 seconds between disabling extra sleep mode and restoring the
connection.
 For details on extra sleep mode, refer to the manual for the flat panel sensor.
897N203543D 7-3
 Exposure Unit Battery Indicator

The following icons display the battery status when connected to the DR cassette.
: Ready for exposure (battery charge: fully charged)

: Ready for exposure (exposure time available: less than one hour)
: Ready for exposure (battery charge: recharge needed)
: Ready for exposure (charging)
: Not ready for exposure
 Grid Indicator
The following icons display the grid utilization status of the exposure unit corresponding to the
selector selected in the exposure unit display field of the “Study screen”.
: Grid in use
: Grid not in use
 Console Event Indicator

The following icons display the status of the Console.
: Normal
: Warning-level event ongoing
: Error-level event ongoing
 Console Battery Indicator

The status of the PC battery and of PC connection to the AC adapter are shown by the icons
below.
: Ready for use

: Ready for use
: Ready for use (battery charge: recharge needed)
: Ready for use (charging or the AC adapter connected)
: Not ready for use
 Console Wireless Communication Indicator

The status of wireless communication between the Console and the X-ray room or between the
Console and the utility box is shown by the icons below.
/ / / : Connected. Radio field strength is displayed in four levels.
: Disconnected
7-4 897N203543D
 Order Issuance Device Indicator

The order issuance device indicator appears if either of the following optional software programs
is installed.
 DICOM Modality Worklist Management Software and DICOM Modality Performed Procedure
Step Software
 FUJIFILM standard ordering optional software
: If the above optional software is configured online
: If the above optional software is not configured online
 XCON Indicator
The status of connection to XCON is shown by the icons below. To show these icons, the
settings are required at the time of installation.
: Online
: Offline
 Output Status Indicator

The following icons display the output status.
: Waiting for image output
: Processing image output
: Output error

 Wireless communication status indicator
The status of wireless communication between the Console and the hospital LAN is shown by
the icons below.
/ / / : Connected. Radio field strength is displayed in four levels.
: Switching connection
: Disconnected
 Starting the General RIS Browser Software

897N203543D 7-5
7.2 Detailed Information Display Window

The detailed information window will appear when clicking each indicator icon shown in the
connected devices status.
7.2.1 Event List window

The “Event List window” is shown when clicking the Console event indicator.
If a different window is displayed, select [Event] at the top of the window to display the “Event
List window”.
“Event List window”
1 Click on a column heading to sort the display by that column.

2 If the event does not appear within one window, you can select and scroll.
After selecting an event, click one of the buttons to check or delete the event.
Details about each button are shown below.
Display update:
Updates the “Event List window” to display the latest information.
[Detail]:
Displays a window for checking details about the event.
[Confirm]:
Displays an exclamation mark (!) (confirmed) in the confirmation status field of
the selected event (shown leftmost on event row). If an exclamation mark (!)
already appears, then this button will be disabled.
[Confirm all]:
Displays an exclamation mark (!) (confirmed) in the confirmation status fields of
all events (shown leftmost on event row).
[Delete]:
Deletes the selected event.
7-6 897N203543D
[Delete all]:
Deletes all events.
When you have finished working, click [OK] to close the “Event List window”.
Note
 When the number of events in the “Event List window” passes 500, the excess events will
be deleted automatically, oldest first.
Note that events will be deleted regardless of whether they have been confirmed.
 Multiple events cannot be selected at the same time.
 If there are no events displayed, the [Detail], [Confirm], [Confirm all], [Delete], and [Delete
all] buttons will be disabled.
 If no event is selected, the [Detail], [Confirm], and [Delete] buttons will be disabled.
7.2.2 Image Reader Status window

The “Image Reader Status window” is shown when clicking the image reader message display
field or the Image Reader indicator. If a different window is displayed, select [Reading Device] at
the top of the window to show the “Image Reader Status window”.
2 3 4 5

6
7
“Image Reader Status window”
1 Connected Device Name:

All image readers registered in Console system will be listed.
2 Message:
If messages have been received from the image reader, then the latest message
will appear.
3 Device Status:
The status of the image reader is displayed. The same icon as the one shown in
the [Selector] appears.
897N203543D 7-7
4 Battery Level:
The status of the battery is displayed when the battery is used. The same icon
as the one shown in the “Exposure unit battery indicator” appears.
5 Communication Status:
The communication status with the image reader is displayed. The same icon as
the one shown in the “Exposure unit communication indicator” appears.
6 Detailed Information:
When any image reader listed above is selected, its detail information is
displayed here.
7 Device Operation Button:
Operation request from the image reader will be displayed on the button. Select
the button when requested to perform the operation.
After an Image Reader is selected, click on one of the buttons on the bottom right of the window
to configure that Image Reader.
[High Sensitivity]:
Each time this button is clicked, the reading sensitivity switches between “Auto
Sensitivity Changeover Mode” and “High Sensitivity Exposure Mode”. When
“High Sensitivity Exposure Mode” is activated, is displayed on the right
side of the icon indicating the communication status of the image reader.
Whether the user can change the reading sensitivity depends on the settings at
the time of installation and the image reader that is connected.
[Scanner Cleaning]:
Scanner cleaning is only performed if FCR cassette is selected. This button is
disabled if FCR cassette is not selected.
[Delete IP]:
This only deletes the IP if the FCR VELOCITY series is selected. This button is
disabled if the FCR VELOCITY series is not selected.
When you have finished working, click [OK] to close the “Image Reader Status window”.
Note
 If the selector that is selected in the exposure unit display field of the “Study screen” is the
DR exposure unit, then the name of the DR exposure unit will appear in the “Image
Reader Status window”. If the FCR exposure unit is selected, then the name of the FCR
exposure unit will appear there.
 If the selector that is selected in the exposure unit display field of the “Study screen” is the
DR exposure unit, then the [High Sensitivity], [Scanner Cleaning], and [Delete IP] buttons
will be disabled.
7-8 897N203543D
7.2.3 Ordering Device Setup window

Click the order issuance device indicator to display the “Ordering Device Setup window”.
If a different window is displayed, select [Ordering Device] at the top of the window to display the
“Ordering Device Setup window”.
The display of the “Ordering Device Setup window” will differ depending on the optional software
that is installed.
 If the DICOM Modality Worklist Management Software and DICOM Modality Performed
Procedure Step Software are installed
1 2
3 4
“Ordering Device Setup window”
1 Order information toggle button:

Clicking the button will toggle the connection to the DICOM Modality Worklist

Management Software (online/offline).
2 Order information device selector:
Click this to display the “Ordering Device Selection window”, and select the
ordering device to receive orders.
3 Exposure result toggle button:
Clicking the button will toggle the connection to the DICOM Modality Performed
Procedure Step Software (online/offline).
4 Exposure result device selector:
Click this to display the “Ordering Device Selection window”, and select the
ordering device to send exposure histories.
897N203543D 7-9
 If the FUJIFILM standard ordering optional software is installed
“Ordering Device Setup window”
1 Clicking the button will toggle the connection to the simplified ordering device (online/
offline).
2 Clicking this button toggles whether the exposure result is returned to the simplified
ordering device.
When you have finished working, click [OK] to close the “Ordering Device Setup window”.
7.2.4 Output Status window

Click the output status indicator to display the “Output Status window”.
If a different window is displayed, select [Output queue] at the top of the window to display the
“Output Status window”.
“Output Status window”
1 Click on a column heading to sort the display by that column.

2 If an item does not appear within one window, you can select and scroll.
The study information displayed in the “Output Status window” is shown below.
 [Accession No.]
7-10 897N203543D
 [Patient ID]
 [Patient's Name]
 [Study Date]
 [Study Time]
 [Output Device]
 [Status]
After selecting the study, select the button in the upper part of the window to perform/cancel
output, etc.
[Display update]:
Displays the latest output status.
[Retry]:
Redoes the output for a study in which an output error occurred.
[Delete]:
Cancels the output and deletes the selected study from the “Output Status
window”.
[Device Status]:
Displays the “Output Device Status window”.
 “7.2.4 Output Status window” - “ Confirm status of output device”
When you have finished working, click [OK] to close the “Output Status window”.
Note
 Multiple studies cannot be selected.
 If there are no studies displayed, then the [Retry] and [Delete] buttons will be disabled.
 If there are no studies selected, then the [Retry] and [Delete] buttons will be disabled.
897N203543D 7-11
 Confirm status of output device

In the “Output Status window”, select [Device Status] to display the “Output Device Status
window”.
Confirm the status of the output device in the “Output Device Status window”.
1 2
“Output Device Status window”
1 Displays the latest output device status.

2 Returns to the “Output Status window”.
3 If an item does not appear within one window, you can select and scroll.
The output device information displayed in the “Output Device Status window” is shown below.
 [Host Name/AE Name]
 [Device Attribute] (print attributes/file attributes)
 [Device Status]
When you have finished working, click [OK] to close the “Output Device Status window”.
7-12 897N203543D
7.2.5 Wireless Connection Status window

The “Hospital Line Status window” is shown when clicking the wireless communication status
indicator. If a different window is displayed, select [Wireless network status] at the top of the
window to show the “Hospital Line Status window”.
The settings at the time of installation are required to show this window.
“Hospital Line Status window”
You can check the status of hospital LAN in the “Hospital Line Status window”. The name and
status of each network are shown. The network that is in use now has been selected.
 Switching networks
Select the desired network from those shown on the window.
is displayed during network switching. Wait for a while until disappears. If network

switching failed, will appear.
 Restoring the network connection

The restoration of the network that has been selected is executed when clicking [Repair].
If the network connection failed or is poor, click [Repair]. The network connection may recover.
897N203543D 7-13
7-14 897N203543D
Chapter
8 Functions when Using
the Mobile PC
8.1 Functions when using the mobile PC

The following is an outline of convenient functions that can be utilized when using the mobile PC.
8.1.1 General purpose launcher
Selecting the on the top right of the screen displays the general purpose launcher for the
following mobile PC tools.
Selecting any button on the general purpose launcher displays the software keyboard and the
USB memory management screen, or hides the software keyboard. Refer to the following for
more information.
: displays the software keyboard.

: hides the software keyboard.
: displays the USB memory management screen.
8.1.2 PPS cache server function

The PPS cache server function saves past information of studies sent from the Console on the
PPS cache server. Launching the Console will automatically launch the PPS cache server
function.
Note that this function requires that optional software is installed, and that relevant setting are
adjusted during installation.
The past information sent from the Console to the PPS cache server is as follows.
 Start study
 End study
 Interrupt study
Selecting the PPS cache button on the bottom left of the screen displays the “PPS Cache List
Screen”.
897N203543D 8-1
The state of the PPS cache button is as follows.

PPS cache server connected: green
PPS cache server disconnected: orange
“PPS Cache List Screen”

“PPS Cache List Screen” operations are as follows.
RIS: displayed as “RIS:ONLINE” if there is a normal connection with the RIS terminal device, and
“RIS:OFFLINE” if there is an error.
: updates the list display to the latest information.
: selects all studies displayed in the list.
: deletes the currently selected study from the list. Selecting displays
the “Check Screen”, and selecting [OK] deletes the study.
Total: displays the number of studies displayed in the list.
: displays the “Version Information Screen”.
: closes the “PPS Cache List Screen”.
8.1.3 Read order information from USB memory

Order information can be read from USB memory. Use drive letter USB memory with the drive
letter “(J:)” in this case.
After entering a password on the security software of the USB memory, order information (XML
format) in the “J:/” directory is read to the Console.
The simple ordering function can only be used when optional software is installed. Refer to
“Console Advance Reference Guide (Option)” for more information on order information that can
be received from RIS terminal devices and steps after reading order information.
8-2 897N203543D
Note
 After reading order information from USB memory, be sure to delete the order information
from the USB memory. Note that failure to delete the information could mean the read
order information could be read a second time.
 Do not connect two or more USB memory devices to a single computer. If USB memory
for media storage software is connected at the same time, the “Please remove the unused
USB memory device” message may be displayed.
 If the USB memory management screen has become hidden from view, press the [Alt] and
[Tab] keys on the software keyboard. The icons representing the software applications that
are currently running will be displayed in the center of the screen. Additionally, while
holding down the [Alt] key, press the [Tab] key a number of times until the USB memory
management program is selected. The USB memory management screen appears.
8.1.4 Remaining battery level

If the remaining battery level of the computer drops, the Console will operate as follows.
 Low remaining battery level: a message is displayed.
 Extremely low remaining battery level: A warning message is displayed. Recharge the
computer immediately. Note that continuing to use the Console without recharging the
computer may result in power being lost all of a sudden.
Any malfunctions related to this are not covered by warranty.
Note
 “Power Options” in Windows must be set with the user utility to set the operation when
there is an extremely low remaining battery level.
8.1.5 Displaying software keyboard

The software keyboard appears when the text entry field is selected.
However, the following screens are not covered.
Study reception screen, Patient information change dialog, User Utility, and F-RIS screen
Note

 To use this function, it needs to be set at the time of installation.
 When this function is active, the annotation initial position that is set with the annotation
setting screen is the top of the image display area.
 On rare occasions, the keyboard will not appear even if the text entry field is selected. If
this occurs, click the software keyboard display button in the general-purpose launcher.
897N203543D 8-3
8-4 897N203543D
Chapter
9 User Utility Operations
9.1 Before Operation

9.1.1 The User Utility Functions
This chapter describes the functions of the User Utility.
 Menu Setting (“9.2 Menu Setting”)

The settings for exposure and study menus are described below.
 Exposure Menu Setting
Creates, edits, and deletes exposure menus.
 Study Menu Setting
Creates, edits, and deletes study menus.
 Display Group Setting
Creates, relocates, renames, and deletes menu groups to be displayed on the routine
operation screen, and also can select groups not to be displayed on the screen.
 Display Menu Setting
Registers, relocates, and deletes menus to be displayed on the routine operation screen.
 Table Setting ( “9.3 Table Setting”)

The settings for information tables are described below.
 Technologist Information Setting
Registers, edits, relocates, and deletes technologist information.
 Requesting Department Information Setting
Registers, edits, relocates, and deletes requesting department information.
 Film Mark Setting
Registers, edits, relocates, and deletes film marks.
 User Group Management
Manages user groups.
 Mis-exposure Comment Setting
Registers, edits, relocates, and deletes comments on mis-exposures.
 Anatomic Region Setting
Registers, edits, and deletes anatomic regions.
 Text Marker Preset Setting
Registers, edits, or deletes a text marker.
 Property Setting ( “9.4 Property Setting”)

Sets the operating environment.
897N203543D 9-1
 Parameter Batch Updating ( “9.5 Parameter Batch Updating”)

Updates all exposure parameters for all exposure menus in batch.
To perform this operation, the User Utility must be started up under the authority of a super user.
General users are not allowed to perform this operation.
 Backup and Restoration ( “9.6 Backup and Restoration”)

Performs backup or restoration of information.
 Backup
Makes backups of various information.
 Restoration
Restores various information.
 Patient Information DB Utility ( “9.7 Patient Information DB Utility”)

Performs the maintenance, backup and restoration of the patient information database.
 Patient Information Maintenance
Registers, edits and deletes patient information.
 Import of Patient Information
Imports patient information from external units, and registers it to the database in batch.
 Export of Patient Information
Exports patient information and saves it to media, etc.
 Memory Exposure Mode ( “4.3 Memory Exposure Mode”)

Deletes all images that are not linked to exposure menus in memory exposure mode.
 Exposure Result Log ( “9.8 Exposure Result Log”)

Clears or saves the exposure result logs for completed studies. However, the prior setting at the
time of the installation is required.
 Saving Logs
Exports the exposure result logs and the rejected film logs of completed studies, and then
saves those logs onto media.
 Clearing Logs
Clears current exposure results and mis-exposure logs.
 Customizing the Screen Display ( “9.9 Customizing the Screen Display”)

Performs customization of screen (setting the following items to be displayed).
 QA Function Shortcut
QA function means an image processing function which includes image trimming and
rotation. Registers, relocates and deletes QA shortcut buttons to be displayed on the “Study
screen”.
 Customizing the Study List Controller
Registers, relocates and deletes the buttons displayed on the study list controller of the
“Study List screen”.
 Customizing the QA Function Buttons
QA means an image processing such as image trimming or rotation. Registers, relocates and
deletes the QA function buttons displayed on the “Image Edit screen”.
9-2 897N203543D
 Customizing the QA Controller Buttons

QA function means an image processing function which includes image trimming and
rotation. Registers, relocates, and deletes QA image controller buttons to be displayed on the
“Image Edit screen”.
 Image area operation
When using the wide monitor, the buttons to be displayed in the image area operation of the
“Study screen” can be registered, relocated, or deleted.
 Image Display Setting
Sets buttons to be displayed on the “Study screen” and “Study List screen”.
 Exposure Parameter Shortcut
Registers, relocates and deletes exposure parameter shortcut buttons to be displayed on the
“Study screen”.
 Customizing the Connected Devices Status
Registers, relocates and deletes device information to be displayed on the connected devices
status.
 Calculating the Use Frequency ( “9.10 Calculating the Use Frequency”)

Calculates how many times each IP and flat panel sensor has been used.
 Narrow-down Searching
Shows on the use count list the number of times the IP and flat panel sensors matching the
specified search conditions have been used.
 Outputting the List Files
Outputs the list of how many times each IP and flat panel sensor has been used to a file in
“.csv” format.
 Resetting the Use Count
Resets the count of how many times each IP and flat panel sensor has been used.
897N203543D 9-3
9.1.2 Starting and Terminating the User Utility
 Starting the User Utility

Starts the User Utility. If the user authentication has been specified at the time of installation, the
functions to be used can be customized for each user.
Before performing the following operations, start up the Console and display the patient
information screen (or any of the lists).
(1) Select and then select the [User Utility] from the displayed menu.
The following confirmation box will be displayed.
(2) Select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the startup of the User Utility.
The routine operation mode is interrupted, and the “User Authentication” window is displayed.
9-4 897N203543D
(3) After entering the user name and password, select [OK].
When the password for general users has already been entered, simply select [OK].
For other than above, any one of the following operations is performed depending on settings.
 When login by using a smart card: Read the smart card.
 When login by entering a user name and a password: Enter the user name and the password.
 When login by using a smart card, a user name and a password: Read the smart card and
then enter the user name and the password. The user name is automatically read from the
smart card that is read.
Note
 If the following message is displayed when the user authentication in the Windows Active
Directory is being run, after selecting logging in can be performed via the
“.\EMGUser” emergency access user name. It can be used within the scope of the general
user rights.
The default password is “$tandard#User”. However, be sure to change the password. For Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
details on changing passwords, see “Console Advance Operation Manual”.
 If you failed to login with a certain user name thrice or more times continuously in an hour,
the login with the user name is locked according to the setting at the time of installation. In
that case, log in with another user name belonging to the user group of the administrator
and then unlock the locked user name with the User Utility.
[Terminate]:
Terminates the User Utility.
897N203543D 9-5
When the User Utility starts, the “Main Menu - User Utility” window is displayed.
9-6 897N203543D
 Terminating the User Utility

This section describes how to terminate the User Utility. Before performing the following
operations, display the “Main Menu - User Utility” window.
(1) Select [Terminate] in the “Main Menu - User Utility” window.

The User Utility is terminated.
After the User Utility is terminated, the routine operation mode will be restarted, and the initial
screen will be displayed.
897N203543D 9-7
9.2 Menu Setting

This chapter describes various settings related to exposure menus and study menus.
(1) Select [Menu Setting].
: Creates, edits, and deletes the exposure menus or study menus.
: Batch set the exposure menus and image processing parameters.
9.2.1 Menu Setting
Note
 If use of user authentication was set at the time of installation, the “Enter Password”
window will appear when you select [Menu Setting]. After you enter the password, select
[OK].
([Cancel] Cancels operation.)
The “Menu Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.
9-8 897N203543D
<For text >
1 2
1 The [Display Setting] field

2 The [Exposure/Study Menu] field
<For graphics>
1 2 3
1 Body part
2 The [Display Setting] field
3 The [Exposure/Study Menu] field
Exposure and study menus currently registered are listed on the [Exposure/Study Menu] field at
the right side of the screen. The menus can be created, edited or deleted in this field.
Exposure menus and study menus are listed by group in the [Display Setting] field/“Body part”
at the left side of the screen (same as in the routine operation mode screen). The displays of
menus and groups can be set in this field.
897N203543D 9-9
To create exposure menus or study menus, press [New] on the [Exposure/Study Menu] field and
register the displays on the [Display Setting] field/“Body part”.
 For details of creating new menus, see “9.2.1.1 Exposure Menu Setting” - “ Creating
Exposure Menus” and “9.2.1.3 Study Menu Setting” - “ Creating Study Menus”.
 For details of display settings, see “9.2.1.5 Display Menu Setting” - “ Registering Display
Menus”.
9.2.1.1 Exposure Menu Setting

This section describes how to create, edit, and delete exposure menus.
 Creating Exposure Menus

A new exposure menu is created by copying and rewriting the information of an existing
exposure menu.
(1) Select [Exposure Menu] in the [Exposure/Study Menu] field.

The exposure menus currently registered are listed. Select an exposure menu to be copied, or
select an exposure menu (button) from the [Display Setting] field.
Note
 Select an exposure menu which has a similar exposure style (anatomical region and
positioning) for a copying menu. Copying an exposure menu of non-similar region (e.g.
copying a menu of head for chest) may lead to an abnormal image.
(2) Select [New].
The “Exposure Menu Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.
(3) Select whether the exposure menu to create is for [CR] or [DR].
(4) Set menu codes and names.

Set all of the following codes and names.
 [Extended Menu Code]
 [MPM Code]
9-10 897N203543D
 [ANK Exposure Menu Name]

Setting a menu code
1 and menu name
 Extended Menu Code

The extended menu code is the code to manage exposure menus. When the code is identical
with the one of the original exposure menu, MPM code from the original exposure menu is
used.
The exposure menus with the same MPM code have same EDR (the function which
automatically adjusts density and contrast) and image processing parameters. Therefore, if
the menus have a different extended menu code, EDR and the image processing parameters
are the same as ones from the original exposure menu.
In the box for an extended menu code, an unused code is set in default. To change the code,
enter any code (a maximum of 16 characters; * and @ cannot be used). The same code
cannot be used for more than one exposure menu.
Example:
By copying a “CERVICAL SPINE” (MPM code:0107) menu, different exposure menus such
as “CERVICAL,OBL”, “CERVICAL,LAT”, “CERVICAL,RAO”, “CERVICAL,LAO” are created.
However, EDR and the image processing parameters in the original menu are not changed.
897N203543D 9-11
Image
MPM Extended Menu
Menu Name EDR Processing Remarks
Code Code
Parameters
Original CERVICAL The exposure
0107 0107-0000
exposure menu SPINE parameters (Invert
Image, Film Mark,
Newly created CERVICAL,
0107 0107-0001 and others.) can be
exposure menu OBL
set separately for
CERVICAL, each exposure
0107 0107-0002
LAT menu. The image
CERVICAL, Same Same processing
0107 0107-0003
RAO parameters for the
newly created
CERVICAL,
exposure menu
LAO
changes when the
0107 0107-0004 parameters for the
original exposure
menu changes.
 MPM Code
The MPM code is a four-digit code number to manage exposure menus. An image is
generated by using the exposure methods available in an exposure unit. The Console applies
a code to specify an image processing method to the image after receiving it from the
exposure unit. The MPM code determines EDR (a function which automatically adjusts image
density and contrast) and image processing conditions.
Example:
0 1 0 7
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Fourth digit:

This character determines EDR.
(2) Third digit:
Any character from the range of 0 to 9 and A to F
EDR is not affected with the change of this character.
(3) Second digit:
This character indicates an anatomical region.
(Example > 0: head 1: neck 2: chest, etc.)
(4) First digit:
This character indicates the characteristics of exposure for the image, not
specifying the exposure technique.
(Example > 0 : general exposure 1: contrast exposure 2 : tomography, etc.)
9-12 897N203543D
In the box for the MPM code, the code from the original exposure menu is set in default. Select
an unused code from the dropdown list.
If the selected code has already used in other exposure menus, the exposure menu is displayed
in the [Related Menu] field. When the code is displayed in the [Related Menu] field, select
another unused code, and make sure no other code is displayed in the field.
Example:
Based on a “PELVIS,FRN” (MPM code: 0500) menu, a new “PELVIS,OBL” menu with changed
image processing parameters and exposure parameters is created.
Original exposure menu PELVIS, FRN (MPM code: 0500)

Newly created exposure menu PELVIS, OBL (05x0, “x” can be any character.)
 Exposure Menu Name

Enter the exposure menu name (a maximum of 64 characters; * and @ cannot be used).
Note
 When a long name is inputted, the name may be cut off on the screen. Input a space
between each word. If a term is more than 20 characters, adjust the name with a hyphen
( - ) or space.
(5) If necessary, set exposure parameters, and select [OK].

 About the exposure parameter setting, see “9.2.1.1 Exposure Menu Setting” - “ Exposure
Parameter Setting”.
[Cancel]:
Cancels the creation of an exposure menu.
The created exposure menu is not displayed on the routine operation screen until its display is
registered.
 To register the display of the exposure menu, see “9.2.1.5 Display Menu Setting” - “
Registering Display Menus”.
 Exposure Parameter Setting

Select the [Exposure Parameter 1], [Exposure Parameter 2] and [Exposure Parameter 3] tabs to
set exposure parameters. Set each exposure parameter. The exposure parameters displayed in
the field differ depending on the exposure menus and available optional functions.
Note
 If any setting such as the radiation field or exposure size of image is modified in the DR
exposure unit during the exposure, the one modified in the DR exposure unit is reflected to
the image rather than the setting made in the following screen.
897N203543D 9-13
[Exposure Parameter 1]
 [Invert Image]
Select a reverse display of the image.
Normally, [Frontal Image] and [Vertical] can be selected. The prior setting at the time of
installation is required to make [Horizontal] and [180-deg. Rotation] selectable.
 [Rotate Image]
This setting enables to rotate the display of an image. This item is normally fixed as [None].
The prior setting at the time of installation is required to make [Rotate 90 degree] selectable.
 [EDR Mode]
Select an EDR (the function that automatically adjusts the density and contract) mode.
To set [Fix] mode, enter [S Value] (4 to 20047). [S Value] can be changed either with the arrow
button or by entering numbers with a keyboard.
[Auto]:
Calculates the amount of density and contrast adjustments by performing the
EDR processing.
[Semi]:
Calculates only the amount of density adjustment by performing the EDR
processing. For the amount of contrast adjustment, the fixed value of each
exposure menu applies.
[Fix]:
Allows the user to specify the amount of density adjustment. For the amount of
contrast adjustment, the fixed value of each exposure menu applies.
 [Eit value]:
Set an EIt value when the EI/DI display is enabled. The EI/DI (defined in IEC 62494-1:2008)
displayed in the overlay of exposure results on the “Study screen” and “Image Edit screen”
are calculated based on the Elt value set here.
Note
 For mammographic exposure, the EI/DI values are not calculated even when you set the
Elt value.
 From the software version V7.4, even when the same body part is made exposures with
the same dose as before, the EI value may be lowered. When the DI warning function is
used, change the Elt value with consideration of operational situations. If you have any
inquiries on setting the EI/DI values and Elt value, contact FUJIFILM or a designated
distributor.
9-14 897N203543D
 [Film Output Format]

Select a film output format.
 Specifying image position
Select a display position of an image in the image frame.
 [Film Mark]
Set a film mark (character displayed on the film). This item can be selected with the dropdown
list or by entering characters (a maximum of 10 characters) with a keyboard.
 For the setting of film marks listed in the dropdown list, see “9.3.3 Film Mark Setting”.
 [Distribution Code]
Select a distribution code (a code number to specify the transfer destination) of the image
from the dropdown list.
 [Function]
Select a function (special processing) from the dropdown list.
When one of the following functions is selected, it is automatically reflected on the panel
exposure mode setting.
[WS]:
Whole spine processing. Usually it is set to the exposure menus for the Image-
composition Processing (optional software). If it is set when the user’s unit does
not have the image-composing function, the image processing defined to this
function is only applied to the exposure menus.
[RT]:
Routine processing
[TM]:
Tomography processing
 [No. of Output Film]

Set the number of films to be output. This item can be changed either with the arrow button or
by entering the number with a keyboard. The number of films that can be set varies
depending on the setting at the time of installation.
When the filing mode in [Exposure Parameter 2] is set to [OFF], do not set this item to [0].
 [Tube/Technique code]

Select the code number specifying tube and technique (of exposure unit) with the dropdown
lists.
The correlation of a code number and a technique are set at the time of installation.
897N203543D 9-15
 [Reading Sensitivity Center Shift] (for CR)

Select a reading sensitivity to the image exposed with high sensitivity (low X-ray dose).
Select [High Sensitivity] for images with S value set to 800 or higher.
 [Film Reference Orientation]
Select the reference direction to output image on a film. This parameter is available with the
one-image format of 8" x 10" size and the two-image format of 14" x 14" size.
Select [Portrait] to output a film with a 90 degree-rotated image.
 [Film Edge]
Select a color for film edge (frame of the image).
 [Pixel Density] (for CR)
Select pixel density of the image. (This setting cannot be changed for DR images.)
 [Filing Mode]
Select an image saving mode. Normally, [OFF] (not to record) or [ON] (to record) is selected.
If a filing unit is not connected, this parameter is not valid.
 [Film Size]
Select a film size. This parameter is used as an actual exposure result information sent to the
RIS terminal units. It does not affect the actual film size.
Film sizes that can be selected are set at the time of installation.
 [Auto repeat]
Select either [OFF] (do not perform) or [ON] (perform) for the auto repeat exposures.
 [Number of division exposure]
Set the number of division exposure. This value can be changed by using arrow buttons or
entered by using a keyboard directly.
 [Coding Scheme Designator]
Enter the name of coding scheme designator (a maximum of 16 characters; * and @ cannot
be used).
9-16 897N203543D
 Image reading mode (for CR)

Select a desired reading mode used to read images on the Image Reader.
[FR]:
5 lines/mm reading mode
[SR]:
10 lines/mm reading mode
[GR]:
10 lines/mm GR reading mode
“FR: 5 lines/mm reading mode” reads images in high-speed mode.

Shown below are the IP sizes that can be read in high-speed mode.
- 14”x17”
- 14”x14”
Whether FR mode can be selected or not depends on the connected Image Reader.
Even if FR mode is selected on Image Readers not available for that mode, images will be
read in SR mode instead.
There are cases where trimming processing cannot be applied on images read by FR mode.
 [Sensitivity Level for Velocity] (for CR)

Set the exposure sensitivity when the Console is connected to a Velocity Image Reader.
- Normal exposure
- High-sensitivity (low-dose) exposure
 [GPR processing] (optional)
Select either [ON] (perform) or [OFF] (do not perform) for the GPR (grid pattern removal)
processing.
Note
 Set the GPR processing to ON only when a stationary grid is used.
 [Various Fill Density]
Set the paint density for the optional blackening processing, image rotation by an arbitrary
angle, or standard size output (DR images only) to either 0, 25, 50, 75, or 100%.
897N203543D 9-17
Display Color Setting

Select [Display Color Setting] in the [Exposure Parameter 1] tab.
The “Display Color Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.

Select an exposure menu display color.
[Cancel]:
Cancels the setting of display color.
Colors other than the ones on the dialog are also selectable.
Select [Arbitrarily selectable.].
A dialog for color is displayed. After selecting a color, select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the selection of a color.
9-18 897N203543D
Image Processing Parameter Setting

Select [Image Processing Parameter Setting] in the [Exposure Parameter 1] tab.
The “Image Processing Parameter Setting - User Utility” window is displayed. The image
processing parameters displayed on the field differ depending on the exposure menus and
available optional functions.
After setting each image processing parameters, select [OK].
 For details of image processing parameters, see the list of image processing parameters
described in the following pages. Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
[Cancel]:
Cancels the setting of parameters.
897N203543D 9-19
 [Image Position]
Select an image to which the setting of the image processing parameter is to be applied.
 [Image Processing]
Choose the desired flat panel sensor from the drop-down list of [Panel Type]. Then, set
proper parameters for the flat panel sensor. The following flat panel sensors are available.
[a-Se] / [GOS] / [GOS-2] / [GOS-3] / [GOS-4] / [GOS-5] / [CsI] / [CsI-2] / [CsI-3] / [CsI-M] /
[CsI-H]
Select whether to enable (ON) or disabled (OFF) Dynamic Range Control Processing (DRC),
Tomographic Artifacts Suppression Processing (TAS), Frequency Noise Control Processing
(FNC), Sharpness (CRF), Multi-objective Frequency Processing (MFP), and Pattern
Enhancement Processing for Mammography (PEM).
The CRF can be set during the DR exposure. The MPF can be set when the MFP option is
enabled. The PEM can be set during the CR exposure and when the PEM option is enabled.
 [GP] / [RP] / [DRC] / [TAS] / [FNC] / [CRF] / [MFP] / [PEM]
Set each image processing parameter.
 Return to default
If this button is selected, the FUJIFILM standard parameter values are set. However, if the
FUJIFILM standard parameter values are not displayed in the [Related Menu] field, this
button is invalid.
Note
 To change image processing parameters, contact a physician who is going to read
images, and verify changed parameters on multiple images.
If the change affects the reading of images, adjust image processing parameters.
Depending on the exposure conditions, the target to be exposed and X-ray generator used
in exposure, too much load on the image processing may cause artifacts, which results in
undesirable restriction on image reading.
9-20 897N203543D
 Note the following when setting DR exposure parameters:

- Set FNC and CRF to ON/OFF for each flat panel sensor.
Select the flat panel sensor to be set from the [Panel Type] dropdown list, and then
select ON or OFF for FNC and CRF.
- Make the FNC and CRF settings for all the connected flat panel sensors.
When FNC and CRF are set or changed for a flat panel sensor, the settings/changes are
applied to other flat panel sensors.
 Note that, depending on conditions, there are limitations in setting the CRF (sharpness)
parameter.
 “5.4.5 Adjusting FNC/CRF Processing”
<Image Processing Parameters>

The characteristics of each parameter are described in the following charts.
GP (Tonal Conversion Processing) Parameter
Parameter Characteristics Input Range

GA Inclination of a tonal curve. It can adjust -4.0 ~ -0.1
the contrast of images. 0.1 to 4.0 (the first decimal place
excluding 0.0)
GT Sharpness of a tonal curve. It attains the A to Z (26 types)
same effect as changing γ curve of
various X-ray films.
GC Central density of inclination of the tonal 0.3 to 2.64 (the second decimal
curve. It changes [GA] based on the place)
density determined in this.
GS Sharpness of a tonal curve. It changes -1.44 to 1.44 (the second decimal
the display density of an entire image. place)
RP (Spatial Frequency Processing) Parameter

RN Enhanced frequency band in frequency 0 to 9 (10 ranks)
processing.
The frequency band determined here Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
becomes the target of enhancement
processing.
RT Sharpness of enhancement curve F, P to Z (12 types)
according to the density of images.
By changing RT, the level of
enhancement in the specific density area
can be adjusted.
RE Level of enhancement of frequency 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place)
processing. According to determined 10 to 16 (no decimal place)
values, the strength of processing is
adjusted.
897N203543D 9-21
DRC (Dynamic Range Control Processing) Parameter

DRN Mask size of dynamic range control. It 0 to 9 (10 sizes)
sets a processing area along with DRT.
DRT Type applied to the DR compression A to T (20 types)
filter. It sets a density area to perform
processing.
DRE Level of enhancement of DR 0.0 to 2.0 (the first decimal place)
compression filter processing. According
to determined values, the strength of
processing is adjusted.
TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression Processing) Parameter

ORN Mask size of tomographic artifacts 0 to 9 (10 sizes)
suppression.
It sets the most effective size according
to the tomographic angle.
ORD Processing direction of tomographic 0: Vertical
artifacts suppression. 1: Horizontal
This parameter is determined according
to the reading direction and the orbital
direction of tomography.
ORE Processing direction of tomographic 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place)
artifacts suppression. 10 to 16 (no decimal place)
According to determined values, the
strength of processing is adjusted.
FNC (Frequency Noise Control Processing) Parameter

FFC Parameters used to determine the A to Z (26 types)
degree of electrical noise control
depending on the X-ray exposure dose.
FNB Parameters used to determine the A to G (7 types)
according to the frequency element.
Low-frequency control will be enhanced
gradually depending on how close it is to
A.
9-22 897N203543D

FNT Parameters used to determine the A to C (3 types)
degree of electrical noise control relating
to the image density.
FNE Parameters used to determine the 0.0 to 1.0 (the first decimal place)
processing.
According to determined values, the
strength of processing is adjusted.
MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing) Parameter (option)

MRB Enhanced frequency band in frequency A to Z (26 types)
processing.
The frequency band determined here
becomes the target of enhancement
processing.
MRT Sharpness of enhancement curve F, P to Z (12 types)
according to the density of images.
By changing MRT, the level of
enhancement in the specific density area
can be adjusted.
MRE Level of enhancement of frequency 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place)
processing. According to determined 10 to 16 (no decimal place)
values, the strength of processing is
adjusted.
MDB Frequency type applied to the DR A to Z (26 types)
compression filter.
This parameter sets a processing area
with MDT.
MDT Type applied to the DR compression A to T (20 types)
filter. It sets a density area to perform
processing. Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
MDE Level of enhancement of DR 0.0 to 2.0 (the first decimal place)

compression filter processing. According
to determined values, the strength of
processing is adjusted.
Parameters corresponding to GP (GA, GT, GC and GS) are gradation parameters used for MFP
processing.
 For the characteristics, see descriptions in the [GP] (Tonal Conversion Processing)
parameters.
897N203543D 9-23
CRF (Sharpness) Parameter (for DR images)

CRFT Filter type for CRF processing. A to Z (26 types)
It sets frequency characteristics to
perform processing.
Note
 Note that, depending on conditions, there are limitations in setting the CRF (sharpness)
parameter.
 “5.4.5 Adjusting FNC/CRF Processing”
PEM (Pattern Enhancement Processing for Mammography) Parameter (optional)

PRN Enhanced frequency band in frequency A to Z (26 types)
processing.
This parameter has the same
characteristics as those of the
conventional [RN] frequency processing
parameter.
PTE Edge detection level. A to Z (26 types)
The calcification detection level changes
according to the specified value.
PTC Calcification detection level. A to Z (26 types)
The calcification detection level changes
according to the specified value.
PRE Level of enhancement of calcifications. 0.0 to 9.9 (the first decimal place)
This parameter has the same 10 to 16 (no decimal place)
characteristics as those of the
conventional [RE] frequency processing
parameter.
Note
 Make sure that PEM does not affect to read an image. If it does affect, the reading of
images, adjust PEM processing parameters. Depending on the exposure conditions, the
target to be exposed and X-ray generator used in exposure, too much load on the image
processing may cause calcification, which results in undesirable restriction on image
reading.
9-24 897N203543D
X-ray Control Parameter Setting

Select the “X-ray control parameter” tab to display the setting field.
The following describes each parameter.

In each parameter, range and value of the setting differ depending on the type of the connected
X-ray control unit. Check details of the model before setting.
[Tube voltage [kV]]:

Set X-ray tube voltage.
[Tube current [mA]]:
Set X-ray tube current.
[Exposure time [ms]]:
Set exposure time.
[mAs Value (x10)]:
Set a mAs value. A value ten times the set value is displayed.
[AEC Setting] / [Sensitivity] / [Density] / [Detection Field]:
Set the items to control the auto-exposure. The detection field setting is applied
differently, depending on the X-ray control unit.
[Focal Spot Size]:
Set a focus spot size.
[ID Code]:
Set a code for setting tube voltage, tube current, and exposure time on the X- Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
ray control unit.
[Exposure Distance [cm]]:
Set the exposure distance.
[Manufacturer/Equipment Code]:
Set the manufacturer and equipment codes.
Note
 Be careful to set each value not to excess the necessary X-ray exposure dose to patients.
 Prior to performing exposure, be sure to check exposure conditions on the X-ray control
unit panel.
 The following items are not available:
[Positioning ID], [Filter ID], [Tomo Angle/Incidence Angle], [Tomographic Speed], and [Cut
Surface Feed].
897N203543D 9-25
 The position of the mAs value parameter changes as shown below, depending on how the
X-ray control unit is connected.
DX Parameter Setting
Select the [DX Parameter] tab to display the setting field.
Availability of this function varies depending on the settings at the time of installation and the
environment.
Note
 Each DX parameter must be set. Otherwise, an error may occur at the time of distribution.
 In a menu other than those used for mammography, the view code and view modifier code
sequence cannot be changed.
 To set the view code and view modifier code sequence, the prior setting at the time of
installation is required.
9-26 897N203543D
 Image laterality
Select the image laterality from the dropdown list.
L: Left
R: Right
U: Unpaired
B: Both left and right
Note
 After having the auto-pairing enabled at the time of installation, if the image laterality for
the paired exposure menus is changed, the paring will be cancelled. If the mammography
image auto-positioning took place, the auto-positioning is canceled in accordance with the
cancellation of the paring.
 [Patient Orientation]
Specify the horizontal and vertical orientations.
[Cancel]:
Cancels operation.
[Settings]:
Sets the exposure orientation.
The “Patient Orientation Setting” window is displayed.
Select the patient exposure orientation, and then [OK].

Specify the orientation by one or two letters.
H: Head
F: Foot
R: Right
L: Left
A: Anterior
P: Posterior
The following is a setting example of the DX parameter when a mammography menu item is
selected and the laterality is set to [L] or [R].
[Laterality] [Anatomic [View Code] [Patient Orientation]

Region]
[Code Meaning] [Code Meaning] [Direction of [Direction of
columns] rows]
R Breast ML (medio-lateral) F P
L Breast ML (medio-lateral) F A
897N203543D 9-27
R Breast MLO (medio-lateral FL P

oblique)
L Breast MLO (medio-lateral FR A
oblique)
R Breast CC (Cranio-caudal) L P
L Breast CC (Cranio-caudal) R A
 [Anatomic Region]
Set the code value, code scheme designator, coding scheme version and code meaning.
[Cancel]:
Cancels operation.
[Settings]:
Changes the settings.
The “Anatomic Region Settings window” is displayed.
Select an anatomic region information, and then select [OK].
Information on anatomic regions can be registered, edited or deleted.

 “9.3.6 Anatomic Region Setting”
9-28 897N203543D
 View Code
Set the code value, code scheme designator, coding scheme version and code meaning.
[Cancel]:
Cancels operation.
[Settings]:
Changes the settings.
The “View Code Settings window” is displayed.
Select a view code and then select [OK].
View codes can be registered, edited or deleted.

 “9.3.7 View Code Setting”
897N203543D 9-29
 View Modifier Code

Set a view modifier code.
[Settings]:
Sets or edits a view modifier code.
The “View Modifier Code Sequence Setting window” is displayed.
Select the desired view modifier code information and then select [OK].
View modifier codes can be registered, edited or deleted.
 “9.3.8 View Modifier Code Setting”
Note
 When setting a view modifier code, be sure to set a view code as well. Otherwise, the
information on the view modifier code that has been set will be deleted.
Trimming Setting
Select the [Trimming settings] tab to display the setting field.
9-30 897N203543D
 [Trimming method]
Select the trimming method in reading images.
 [Interlock with radiation field setting]
If you want to set the trimming size, direction and reference position in conjunction with the
radiation field setting, put a check mark in the check box.
 [Trimming Size]
Select one trimming size for the selected exposure menu.
 [Trimming Direction]
Select vertical or horizontal direction.
 [Trimming Reference Position]
Select a reference position for trimming.
Note
 If any exposure menus are changed or any images are switched after image reading, the
trimming settings before the change are reflected. The trimming settings after the change
are not reflected.
Radiation Field Setting

Select the [Radiation field size] tab to display the setting field.
Radiation field setting can be performed for each of the exposure techniques below.
Table / Upright / DR cassette / CR cassette
 [Radiation field size]

Select one radiation field size for the selected exposure menu.
 [Direction]
Select vertical or horizontal direction.
 [Reference position] (for Table only)
Select a reference position of the radiation field.
897N203543D 9-31
Note
 Be sure to check the X-ray exposure conditions (e.g. radiation field size) before executing
an exposure.
 If the radiation field size and exposure size are changed via a DR unit before executing an
exposure, the change is reflected in images.
Setting allowable ranges of S value and L value

Select the [Setting the Allowable S/L Value Range].
The “Setting the Allowable S/L Value Range - User Utility” window is displayed.
Select the allowable ranges of S and L values, and select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the setting of allowable ranges of S and L values.
 [S value]
The maximum and minimum S values are determined for each exposure menu. The range
including both the maximum and minimum values is the allowable range of S value.
 [L value]
The maximum and minimum L values are determined for each exposure menu. The range
including both the maximum and minimum values is the allowable range of L value.
Smart-QA warning icon appears on the exposure menu list if the image with outside of
allowable range of S or L value is read.
When the warning functions of S and L values are used, a warning mark may be displayed by
error. Make sure to check the exposure conditions and image.
If the warning mark or signal is displayed frequently, contact our official dealer.
9-32 897N203543D
 Editing Exposure Menus

This section describes how to edit information of exposure menus.

The currently registered exposure menus are listed.Select an exposure menu or select an
exposure menu (button) from the [Display Setting] field.
(2) Select [Edit].
The “Exposure Menu Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.
(3) Perform various settings.

 To edit an exposure menu, see “9.2.1.1 Exposure Menu Setting” - “ Creating Exposure
Menus” and “ Exposure Parameter Setting”.
897N203543D 9-33
(4) Select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the editing of an exposure menu.
 Deleting Exposure Menus

This section describes how to delete an exposure menu.

The currently registered exposure menus are listed. Select an exposure menu to be deleted.
Note
 Once a FUJIFILM standard exposure menu is deleted, it cannot be restored. (The
exposure menus created by the user must be recreated to reappear.)
 The registered exposure menus cannot be deleted.
 To delete the registered menus, see “9.2.1.5 Display Menu Setting” - “ Deleting
Display Menus”.
Exposure menus registered in study menus cannot be deleted, either.
(2) Select [Delete].
9-34 897N203543D
9.2.1.2 Exposure Menu Setting (for JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0))

On the Console for which settings are made to comply with the JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0),
the procedure for setting exposure menus is partially different. Follow the procedure below to set
exposure menus.
 Creating Exposure Menus

A new exposure menu is created by copying and rewriting the information of an existing
exposure menu.
Note
 Select an exposure menu which has a similar exposure style (anatomical region and
positioning) for a copying menu. Copying an exposure menu of non-similar region (e.g.
copying a menu of head for chest) may lead to an abnormal image.
(2) Select [New].
The “Exposure Menu Setting” window is displayed.
897N203543D 9-35

Set all of the following codes and names.
 [Extension menu code (1st half)]
 [Extension menu code (2nd half)]
 [ANK Exposure Menu Name]
Setting a menu code and menu name
1
9-36 897N203543D
 [Extension menu code (1st half)] / [Extension menu code (2nd half)]
[Extension menu code (1st half)] / [Extension menu code (2nd half)] refers to a 32-digit code
which manages an exposure menu in accordance with the JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0).
The code comprises the former 16 digits which indicate an image study and the latter 16 digits
which indicate exposure conditions. Set the code so as to be the same as the one registered
in the RIS.
When creating a new exposure menu, the input fields are empty. Enter a code (a maximum of
16 characters; * and @ cannot be used) in each field. The first and second half of an
extension menu code cannot be the same as other exposure menus. If the same code is set,
the following message appears.
Note
 If the input fields for the first and second half of an extension menu code are left empty, the
exposure menu is registered as a FUJIFILM standard exposure menu.
 If an extension menu code is not the same as the one registered in the RIS, the exposure
menu cannot be displayed when a study is received from the RIS and started on the
Console. The following message appears, depending on the settings at the time of
installation.
 Exposure Menu Name

Enter the exposure menu name (a maximum of 64 characters; * and @ cannot be used).
(4) Select each tab, and set the details of an exposure menu.
Note
 When registering a JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0)-compliant exposure menu, it is not
necessary to change "Coding Scheme Designator" in the [Exposure Parameter 2] tab.
897N203543D 9-37
(5) Select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the creation of an exposure menu.
 Editing Exposure Menus

This section describes how to edit information of exposure menus.
(2) Select [Edit].
The [Exposure Menu Setting] window is displayed.

 To edit an exposure menu, see “9.2.1.2 Exposure Menu Setting (for JJ1017 Guideline
(Version 3.0))” - “ Creating Exposure Menus”.
Note
 Regardless of the type of the exposure menu that has been edited to create a new one, if
the input fields for the first and second half of an extension menu code are left empty, the
exposure menu is registered as a FUJIFILM standard exposure menu. If both the input
fields are entered, the exposure menu is registered as a JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0)-
compliant exposure menu.
(4) Select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the editing of an exposure menu.
9-38 897N203543D
 Deleting Exposure Menus

This section describes how to delete an exposure menu.
Note
 Once a FUJIFILM standard exposure menu is deleted, it cannot be restored. (The
exposure menus created by the user must be recreated to reappear.)
Note
 JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0)-compliant exposure menus and FUJIFILM standard
exposure menus can be registered together on the Console. (However, for studies that
can be received from the RIS, their exposure menus must be only those which comply
with the JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0).
 If an exposure menu is added or changed on the Console for a study received from the
RIS, the JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0) does not apply to those menus. (Information
specific to the guideline will not be sent to the RIS.)
 When a study received from the RIS is displayed on the screen, the code meaning of the
exposure menu is displayed as an exposure menu name. The end of the code meaning is
truncated if it is more than 28 characters long. Be careful not to make an exposure under
wrong exposure conditions.
 When adding, changing or deleting an exposure menu, be sure to back up the menu
setting information.
 When restoring information that was backed up on the Console with the settings to comply
with the JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0), make sure that the same settings are made for
the Console, on which restoration is performed. Unless the settings are consistent
between two Consoles, information cannot be restored.
897N203543D 9-39
9.2.1.3 Study Menu Setting

This section describes how to create, edit, and delete a study menu.
The study menu is the menu to which multiple exposure menus for a study are registered
together.
For example, once the study menu named “THORA.SPINE 2R” registering both
“THORA.SPINE,FRN” and “THORA.SPINE,LAT” is created, simply by selecting the created
study menu, the two exposure menus can be readied for the study. As a result, with the study
menu, the exposure menus no longer have to be selected when performing a same study
repeatedly.
<Operation Flow>
In the case of study menus
Select “THORA.SPINE 2R”.

Each menu for “THORA.SPINE,FRN” and “THORA.SPINE,LAT” is expanded.
Process “THORA.SPINE,FRN”.
After the processing is completed, “THORA.SPINE,LAT” is selected automatically.
Process “THORA.SPINE,LAT”.
All processing is completed.
In the case of exposure menus
Select “THORA.SPINE,FRN”.
Process “THORA.SPINE,FRN”.
Select “THORA.SPINE,LAT”.
Process “THORA.SPINE,LAT”.
All processing is completed.
9-40 897N203543D
 Creating Study Menus

This section describes how to create new study menus.
(1) Select [Study Menu] in the [Exposure/Study Menu] field.
(2) Select [New].
The “Study Menu Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.

All items in the window must be filled in before proceeding to next.
Menu Code and Menu Name
1 Setting
 [Study Menu Code]

The study menu code is the code to manage study menus. Enter any code (a maximum of 16
characters; * and @ cannot be used). The same code cannot be used for more than one
study menu.
 [ANK Study Menu Name]
Enter the study menu name (a maximum of 64 characters; * and @ cannot be used).
897N203543D 9-41
(4) Select an exposure menu to be registered in the [Exposure Menu List], and select .
To select more than one exposure menu (a maximum of 32 menus), repeat this operation.
The selected exposure menus are listed in the [Selected Menu], and the exposure order reflects
the order of the selection.
To cancel the selected exposure menu, select that exposure menu, and select .
To change the order of a selected exposure menu, select the exposure menu and then select
(upwards) or (downwards).
(5) If necessary, set study menus, and select [OK].

 For details about the study menu settings, see “9.2.1.3 Study Menu Setting” - “ Study
Menu Setting”.
[Cancel]:
Cancels the creation of a study menu.
The created study menu is not displayed on the routine operation screen until its display is
registered.
 To register the display of the created study menu, perform the operation described in
“9.2.1.5 Display Menu Setting” - “ Registering Display Menus”.
9-42 897N203543D
 Study Menu Setting

This section describes the settings of a created or edited study menu.
Film Output Format Setting

(1) Select a film output format.
 [Default]
Outputs the image on a film in the format set for each exposure menu.
 [2ON1]
Outputs the image on a film in 2-on-1 format.
 [4ON1]
Outputs the image on a film in 4-on-1 format.
Note
 If the format is set to 2-on-1 or 4-on-1 format, the format cannot be changed during the
routine operation.
 [Film Output Position Setting]
Set an output position of image on film when “2-on-1” or “4-on-1” is selected as the film output
format.
(2) Select [Film Output Position Setting].
The “Film Output Position Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.
(3) Complete the operations described in the following pages, and select [OK].
[Cancel]:
897N203543D 9-43
 Relocating an image
Relocates an image to a desired position.
Display a page of images and select the image to be relocated ( or : page turn button),
and move the image to the desired position. The selected image will be replaced to an
existing image. To move the button to be relocated to another page, bring the image over the
page turn button to display another page, and then select the relocating position.
[Set Order of Exposure.]:

Relocates images in exposure order.
9-44 897N203543D
 Rearranging the positions after releasing all images

Releases the current image disposition and rearranges the positions of all images.
Select [Cancel All]. The positions of all images will be canceled.
Display a page of images and select the exposure menu to be arranged ( or : page
turn button) from the [Registered Exposure Menu] field. Move the menu name to the desired
position on the left field. The image is arranged to the position.
To move the button to be relocated to another page, bring the image over the page turn button
to display another page, and then select the relocating position.
Repeat this operation to arrange all images.
Make sure that [Registered] is displayed for all exposure menus at the [Registered Exposure
Menu] field.
[Set Order of Exposure.]:

Relocates images in exposure order.
897N203543D 9-45
 Deleting an image
Deletes an arranged image.
Display a page of images and select an image to be deleted ( or : page turn button)
from the [Registered Exposure Menu] field. Move the image to . The image will be deleted.
After deleting an image, arrange all images.

To arrange the positions of all images, see “Relocating images”, and “Rearranging the
positions after releasing all images” in the preceding pages.
Make sure that [Registered] is displayed for all exposure menus at the [Registered Exposure
Menu] field.
Display Color Setting

(1) Select [Display Color Setting].
The “Display Color Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.
(2) Select a study menu display color.
[Cancel]:
9-46 897N203543D
Colors other than the ones on the dialog are also selectable.
Select [Arbitrarily selectable.].
A dialog for color is displayed. After selecting a color, select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels selecting a color.
Trimming Setting Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
(1) Select [Trimming settings(CR/DR)].
The “Trimming Size Settings” window is displayed.
(2) After setting the various items, select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the setting of trimming.
897N203543D 9-47
The trimming setting of the study menu takes precedence over those of the exposure menu, if
the trimming has been set in both menus.
 [Trimming method]
Select the trimming method for when reading images.
 [Interlock with radiation field setting]
To set the size, direction, and reference position for trimming along with the radiation field
settings, select a check box and put a check on it.
 [Trimming Size]
Select a trimming size for the selected study menu.
 [Trimming Direction]
Select the direction (vertical or horizontal) of the trimming image.
 [Trimming Reference Position]
Select the reference position for trimming.
 Editing Study Menus

This section describes how to edit information in a study menu.

The currently registered study menus are listed. Select a study menu or select a study menu
(button) from the [Display Setting] field.
9-48 897N203543D
(2) Select [Edit].
The “Study Menu Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.

 To edit a study menu, see “9.2.1.3 Study Menu Setting” - “ Creating Study Menus” and
“ Study Menu Setting”.
(4) Select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the editing of a study menu.
897N203543D 9-49
 Deleting Study Menus

This section describes how to delete study menus.

The currently registered study menus are listed. Select a study menu to be deleted.
Note
 The registered study menus cannot be deleted.
 To delete the registered menus, see “9.2.1.5 Display Menu Setting” - “ Deleting
Display Menus”.
9.2.1.4 Display Group Setting

This section describes how to create, relocate, rename, and delete display groups of menus
displayed on the screen of routine operation mode.
 Relocating Display Groups

This section describes how to relocate display groups.
(1) Select the tab of a display group to be relocated, and then move it to the left or the right.
9-50 897N203543D
 Renaming Display Groups

This section describes how to rename display groups.
(1) Select the tab of a display group to be renamed.
(2) Select [Edit Display Group].
The “Display Group Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.
(3) Enter the display group name (a maximum of 64 characters; * and @ cannot be used),
and then select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the renaming of a display group.
897N203543D 9-51
 Deleting Display Groups

This section describes how to delete display groups.
(1) Select the tab of a display group to be deleted.
(2) Select [Edit Display Group].
The “Display Group Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.
The following confirmation box is displayed.
(4) Select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the deleting of a display group.
9-52 897N203543D
 Non-Display Setting of Display Groups

This section describes how to hide a display group from the display.
(1) Select the tab of a display group to be hidden.
(2) Select [Change Display].
The folder of the selected display group is inactivated (displayed in a dark color).
To redisplay the hidden group, select [Change Display] again.
897N203543D 9-53
9.2.1.5 Display Menu Setting

This section describes how to register, relocate, and delete menus displayed on the routine
operation screen.
 Registering Display Menus

This section describes how to register display menus.
(1) Select the tab of a display group to which the menu is to be registered, and display a
page which has a blank button ( or : page turn button).
(2) Select the menu to be registered from the list in the [Exposure/Study Menu] field, and
then move it to the desired blank button.
To move the menu to be relocated to another page, bring the menu over the page turn button to
display another page, and then select the relocating position.
1
1 Bring a mouse cursor over this button to display next page.

2 Move the button to be relocated to a position in another page.
3 Move the button to be relocated to a position in the current page.
9-54 897N203543D
 Relocating Display Menus

This section describes how to relocate a display menu.
(1) Select the tab of a display group to which the menu to be relocated is registered, and
display the page to which the menu is registered ( or : page turn button).
(2) Select the menu to be relocated, and move it to the desired blank button.
1

If the menu is moved onto a position on which a menu is already displayed, the menu to be
relocated and the existing menu switch their locations.
To move the menu to be relocated to another page, bring the menu over the page turn button to
display another page, and then select the relocating position.
897N203543D 9-55
 Deleting Display Menus

This section describes how to delete a display menu.
(1) Select the tab of the deleting display group is registered, and display the page to which
the menu is registered ( or : page turn button).
(2) Select a menu to be deleted, and move it onto the icon.
9-56 897N203543D
9.2.1.6 Quick Start Mode Setting

Register the Study menu/Exposure menu for use in the Quick Start mode
(1) Select , register the Study menu/Exposure menu for use in the Quick Start mode.
897N203543D 9-57
9.2.2 Collective Menu Setting

Collectively rewrite the settings for the selected exposure menus and image processing
parameters.
Hint
 In user mode, there are setting items that are hidden when in default. To set the display/hide
items, the administrator mode needs to be switched. For details on the display/hide settings,
see “9.2.2.7 Customizing the Displays”.
Note
 If the collective menu settings are executed, the rewriting will be applied to the selected
exposure menus or image processing parameters, be very careful in executing them.
Before setting them, back them up.
 The exposure menus that are in line with the JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0) are not
subject to collective setting.
The normal extended menu code will be displayed even if the exposure menus are in line
with the JJ1017 Guideline (Version 3.0).
If you want to change the settings, see “9.2.1 Menu Setting” and set them individually.
 If the image processing parameter FNC (Frequency Noise Control Processing) is
changed, it will be applied to all of the flat panel sensors.
 In the “Image Processing Parameter” window, the numbers which are assigned following
the [(DYN)] in each parameter express the 4 kinds of preset (Preset1-4) numbers.
 Operate after connecting a mouse and keyboard.
 The following are not subject to collective setting. If you want to change the settings, see
“9.2.1 Menu Setting” and set them individually.
 The function settings are for the ES or TO exposure menus
 Change the following settings
- Exposure menu
:CR exposure parameters*, Display colors for exposure menu names, Reviewing Navi
setting (option), Radiation field setting
*Items which are marked with “#” in the exposure menu item list are the CR exposure
parameters.
- Image processing parameters
:CRF (sharpness), CRFT (CRF filter type)
 Set an MPM code that is not currently being used
<Work flow example (when adding exposure menus for rounds)>
Select the exposure menus which are going to be used in rounds
Duplicate by adding “Rounds_” at the beginning of the exposure menu name
Search in “Rounds*”
Select the exposure menus with common exposure conditions, and collectively set them
9-58 897N203543D
Select the exposure menus with common trimming conditions, and collectively set them
Check the setting details and enter them
(1) Select .
The “Collective Menu Setting” window is displayed. A maximum of 65536 items can be
displayed.
(2) Select or , and toggle between the exposure menu item list and
image processing parameter item list displays.
Note Chapter 9 User Utility Operations

 When toggling the item list, if there are changes in the details which are not confirmed, a
confirmation box will be displayed. Make confirmations as needed.
 It may take about 1 to 30 seconds to toggle the item list.
(3) Change the setting values as needed.

For details on changing the setting values, see “9.2.2.2 Collective Setting” and “9.2.2.3 Individual
Setting”.
897N203543D 9-59
(4) The exposure menus whose setting values have been changed will have their character
colors be changed. In addition, “*” will be displayed on the left edges of the list.
Check the changed details, and select .
To cancel the collective menu setting, select .
“Exposure Menu Item List” display example
9-60 897N203543D
“Image Processing Parameter Item List” display example
 Operations which relate to the item list
/ : Toggles between the “Exposure Menu Item List” and “Image Processing
Parameter Item List” displays.
Displays number of items in the item list in ( ).
: Selects the image processing type for image processing parameter to be
changed.
: Selects the reading type for image processing parameter to be changed.
 Operations which relate to the list
/ : When is selected, all of the rows (Exposure menus or Image processing

parameters) are selected, and the button switches to .
To cancel all of the selections, select .
: Cancels all of the search conditions.
: Displays the number of currently displayed exposure menus or image
processing parameters.
: Displays the number of currently selected exposure menus or image
processing parameters.
 Operations which relate to the selected exposure menu
: Duplicates the exposure menu.

For details, see “9.2.2.4 Duplicating the Exposure Menu”.
: Deletes the exposure menu from the list.
For details, see “9.2.2.5 Deleting the Exposure Menu”.
 Operations which relate to the collective menu setting
: Displays change history. Chapter 9 User Utility Operations

For details, see “9.2.2.6 Backup and Restoration”.
: Closes the “Collective Menu Setting” window.
: Saves the setting details.
897N203543D 9-61
9.2.2.1 List Operations
(1) Searching
After entering the search keywords in the search condition input box, press the [Enter] key on
the keyboard. The exposure menus or image processing parameters which correspond to the
keywords are displayed.
If the selection items are displayed when the search condition input box is selected, then select
the target keywords from the displayed items.
Search condition input box
 About the searching operations

 The keywords are not case sensitive.
 If the keywords are entered in multiple items, then they will be searched with AND conditions.
Note
 This function can use wildcards (*, ?) to search. Partial match searching is not applied
when the wildcards are included in the search character strings. An * means a character
string of 0 or more characters, and a ? means any single character (an * can be used up to
two times. Three or more * are treated as a character string. Any number of ? can be used.
An * and a ? can be used together, but an * must be preceded by a ?).
E.g.)
If “head*” is searched for, all of the character strings which start with head will be
displayed.
If “head?” is searched for, all of five-character character strings which start with head will
be displayed.
(2) Sorting
9-62 897N203543D
Each time the target item name is clicked, it will be displayed in ascending or descending order.
 About the sorting operations

Sort in numerical  alphabetical order.
(3) Change the display order

The order of the display items can be changed by dragging and dropping them.
The changed display order is retained, and that will also be reflected the next time it is displayed.
(4) Fixed display columns

The column to the left of the is fixed, and it is always displayed even if it is horizontally scrolled.
The fixed column can be arbitrarily changed by moving to the right or left.
The changed fixed columns are retained, and that will also be reflected the next time they are
displayed.
897N203543D 9-63
9.2.2.2 Collective Setting
Select the row (exposure menu or image processing parameter) for which the setting will be
changed, and select for the item to be changed.
A range of multiple rows can be selected by holding down the [Shift] key while selecting the rows.
In addition, multiple rows can be selected by dragging on the list.
If is selected, all of the rows which are displayed in lists can be selected.
If is selected, then the selected state will be canceled.
Note
 If the searching is operated, then the selected state will be canceled.
 Each item can be set to display/hide. For details on the display/hide settings, see “9.2.2.7
Customizing the Displays”.
 Operations for when setting the character strings or numerical values

For example, for the Filter ID, the following window is displayed.
Enter the setting values, and select .
For items whereby numerical values are to be input, nothing other than numerical values can be
input.
9-64 897N203543D
 Operations for when options are displayed

For example, for the invert image, the following window is displayed.
Specify one of them, and select .
 Operations for when there are multiple input items

For example, for the trimming settings, the following window is displayed.
Only the input items will be subject to the collective setting.
897N203543D 9-65
9.2.2.3 Individual Setting

Right-click the item that is to be changed on the list.
If it is a character string or a numerical value, then it will be in an editable state, so enter the
setting value.
If options are displayed, then choose one of them.
9.2.2.4 Duplicating the Exposure Menu

After selecting the exposure menu that is to be duplicated, then select .
Set the name which is to be given to the duplicated exposure menu, then select .
Hint
 By clicking or , the position which is given to the characters can be changed.
 By deleting the characters in the text box, the characters can be duplicated without them
having to be provided.
Note
 Note that if the “Exposure menu name” exceeds 64 characters after the character strings
are provided, then it will be duplicated with the ends truncated.
9-66 897N203543D
9.2.2.5 Deleting the Exposure Menu
After selecting the exposure menus that are to be deleted, then select .
A confirmation box will be displayed, select to delete the exposure menus which are
selected.
Note
 If the FUJIFILM standard exposure menu is deleted, it cannot be restored. Please be
careful (in order to restore the exposure menus that have been created by the user, they
need to be newly created again).
 If the exposure menus that have been registered for display are deleted, then the
associated display settings will also be deleted.
 The exposure menus that are registered in the study menus cannot be deleted. For the
study menu operations, see “9.2.1.3 Study Menu Setting”.
9.2.2.6 Backup and Restoration

If is selected, the exposure menus, image processing parameters, and display
customization settings data will be backed up.
A maximum of 10 times worth of backup data are saved, and when the maximum number is
exceeded, the oldest dated data will be deleted.
If is selected, a list of backed up data is displayed, so after selecting the target data to be
restored, then select . This will restore it to the state that it was when the backing up was
executed.
Note
 Backup data which was acquired with different software version cannot be restored.
 The exposure menus, image processing parameters, and display customization
information (fixed number of columns, column display order, column widths, column
display/hide) are backed up. Nothing else will be backed up. The information which covers
the backing up and restoring here is included in “9.6 Backup and Restoration”. Therefore,
if all of the information is to be backed up and restored, including settings that are not
subject to the collective menu setting, then perform the operations in “9.6 Backup and
Restoration”.
897N203543D 9-67
9.2.2.7 Customizing the Displays

The items which are displayed in the lists can be set.
This operation needs to be switched to administrator mode. This cannot be operated in user
mode.
Select .
The “Input Password” window will be displayed, so input the VIP password.
In administrator mode, the buttons that set whether to display/hide the list items in user mode
are displayed at the top of the item field. Select (Display) or (Hide).
Select when the settings are completed.
Select again to switch to user mode.
9-68 897N203543D
9.3 Table Setting

This chapter describes settings for information tables.
(1) Select [Table Setting].
The “Table Setting Menu - User Utility” window is displayed.

After completing the settings for each menu, select [OK].
Operations for each menu are described in the following pages.
897N203543D 9-69
9.3.1 Technologist Information Setting

This section describes how to register, edit, relocate, and delete technologist information.
Note
 If user authentication is being used in the Windows Active Directory, then this function is
disabled.
cannot be selected.
(1) Select [Technologist Information Setting].
The “Technologist Information Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.

Complete the operations described in the following pages, and select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the setting.
Note
 Depending on the settings at the time of installation, [Reference] is displayed.
If [Reference] is selected, a message is displayed. Read a registered smart card. Then
“Technologist Information Input” window which corresponds to a user is displayed.
9-70 897N203543D
 Registering Technologist Information

This section describes how to register technologist information.
(1) Select [Register].
The “Technologist Information Input - User Utility” window is displayed.
(2) Set necessary items, and select [OK].
[Cancel]:
 [Technologist Code]
Enter the technologist code (a maximum of 2 characters; * and @ cannot be used). The same
code cannot be used for more than one technologist.
 [ANK Technologist Name]
Enter the technologist name (a maximum of 64 characters; * cannot be used). The same
name cannot be used for more than one technologist.
 [User Name]

Enter a user name to be used when logging into the system (alphanumeric characters and
symbols, a maximum of 64 characters). The same name cannot be used for more than one
technologist. A box for setting a user name appears if the user authentication was specified at
 [Password]
Enter a password to be used when logging into the system (alphanumeric characters and
symbols, a maximum of 20 characters). A box for setting a password appears when the user
authentication was specified at the time of installation.
Note
 The symbols that can be used for the user name and password are as per the following.
`~!@#$%^&*()_-+={}[]¥|:;"'<>,.?/
However, when the user authentication in the Windows Active Directory is being used,
follow the specifications for the Windows Active Directory functions which are provided by
the Windows Server.
897N203543D 9-71
 Do not include personal information such as names, birth dates, etc., with which an
individual can be identified, in the password.
 [User group]
Select a user group assigned for the technologist from the dropdown list.
Only the functions authorized to the user group are available.
 For details of this function, see “9.3.4 User Group Management”.
A box for setting a user group appears if the user authentication was specified at the time of
installation.
 [Smart card information]
This appears depending on the settings at the time of installation.
[Register]:
Register the smart card information. If [Register] is selected, “Smart card
information input” window is displayed. Read the smart card. After completion of
smart card reading, “Smart card information input” window closes and
“Technologist information input” window is displayed again. The icon turns to
.
Note
 Even in the case of the setting that login by using a smart card, the user name and the
password cannot be skipped.
[Delete]:
Delete the registered smart card information. The icon turns to .
 Editing Technologist Information

This section describes how to edit technologist information.
(1) Select the technologist code to be edited.
(2) Select [Edit].
The “Technologist Information Input - User Utility” window is displayed.
9-72 897N203543D
(3) Set necessary items, and then select [OK].
[Cancel]:
 [Technologist Code]
Enter a technologist code (a maximum of 2 characters; * and @ cannot be used). The same
code cannot be used for more than one technologist.
 [ANK Technologist Name]
Enter a technologist name (a maximum of 64 characters; * cannot be used). The same name
cannot be used for more than one technologist.
 [User Name]
Enter a user name to be used when logging into the system (alphanumeric characters and
symbols, a maximum of 64 characters). The same name cannot be used for more than one
technologist. A box for setting a user name appears if the user authentication was specified at
 [Password]
Enter a password to be used when logging into the system (alphanumeric characters and
symbols, a maximum of 20 characters). A box for setting a password appears when the user
authentication was specified at the time of installation.
The symbols that can be used for the user name and password are as per the following.
`~!@#$%^&*()_-+={}[]¥|:;"'<>,.?/
However, when the user authentication in the Windows Active Directory is being used, follow
the specifications for the Windows Active Directory functions which are provided by the
Windows Server.

 [User group]
Select a user group assigned for the technologist from the dropdown list. Only the functions
authorized to the user group are available.
 For details of this function, see “9.3.4 User Group Management”.
A box for setting a user group appears when the user authentication was specified at the time
of installation.
 [Smart card information]
This appears depending on the settings at the time of installation.
[Register]:
Register the smart card information. If [Register] is selected, “Smart card
information input” window is displayed. Read the smart card. After completion of
smart card reading, “Smart card information input” window closes and
“Technologist information input” window is displayed again. The icon turns to
.
897N203543D 9-73
Note
 Even in the case of the setting that login by using a smart card, the user name and the
password cannot be skipped.
[Delete]:
Delete the registered smart card information. The icon turns to .
 Lock status
The lock status appears only when you open technologist information locked with a user
name belonging to the user group of the administrator.
When you open technologist information of an unlocked user name, the lock status does not
appear.
If locked, select and then [OK] to unlock.
 Relocating Technologist Information

This section describes how to relocate technologist information (technologist codes).
(1) Select the technologist code to be relocated.
(2) Select (upward) or (downward) to relocate the code.
9-74 897N203543D
 Deleting Technologist Information

This section describes how to delete technologist information.
(1) Select the technologist code to be deleted.
9.3.2 Requesting Department Information Setting

This section describes how to register, edit, relocate, and delete requesting department
information.
(1) Select [Technologist Information Setting].
The “Requesting Department Information Input - User Utility” window is displayed.

[Cancel]:
Cancels the registration.
897N203543D 9-75
 Registering Requesting Department Information

This section describes how to register requesting department information.
(2) After setting each of the requesting department codes and requesting department
names, select [OK].
[Cancel]:
9-76 897N203543D
 [Requesting Department Code]

Enter the requesting department information code (a maximum of 16 characters; * and @
cannot be used). The same code cannot be used for more than one requesting department
code.
 [ANK Requesting Department Name]
Enter the requesting department name (a maximum of 64 characters; * and @ cannot be
used). The same name cannot be used for more than one requesting department name.
 Editing Requesting Department Information

This section describes how to edit requesting department information.
(1) Select the requesting department code to be edited.
(2) Select [Edit].
(3) After setting each of requesting department codes and requesting department names,
select [OK]. Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
[Cancel]:
897N203543D 9-77
 [Requesting Department Code]

Enter the requesting department information code (a maximum of 16 characters, * and @
cannot be used). The same code cannot be used for more than one requesting department
code.
 [ANK Requesting Department Name]
Enter the requesting department name (a maximum of 64 characters, * and @ cannot be
used). The same name cannot be used for more than one requesting department name.
 Relocating Requesting Department Information

This section describes how to relocate requesting department information (requesting
department codes).
(1) Select the requesting department code to be relocated.
(2) Select (upward) or (downward) to relocate the code.
 Deleting Requesting Department Information

This section describes how to delete requesting department information.
(1) Select the requesting department code to be deleted.
9-78 897N203543D
9.3.3 Film Mark Setting

This section describes how to register, edit, relocate, and delete film marks.
(1) Select [Film Mark Setting].
The “Film Mark Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.

897N203543D 9-79
 Registering and Editing Film Marks

This section describes how to register and edit film marks.
(1) When registering a new film mark, select a blank button.

When editing a film mark, display a page with the film mark to be edited ( or : page turn
buttons), and select the button.
(2) Enter the film mark (a maximum of ten characters; * and @ cannot be used), and then
select [Register]. Input field for a film mark.
Film Mark1Input Field
9-80 897N203543D
 Relocating a Film Mark

This section describes how to relocate a film mark.
(1) Display the page with the film mark to be relocated ( or : page turn buttons) and
select the film mark, and move it onto the desired blank button.
1
2 3

If a film mark is moved onto a button where a different film mark is already displayed, the moved
film mark replaces the button with the already displayed mark.
To move the menu to be relocated to another page, bring the film mark over the page turn button
to display another page, and then select the relocating position.
897N203543D 9-81
 Deleting a Film Mark

This section describes how to delete a film mark.
(1) Display the page with the film mark to be deleted ( or : page turn buttons), and
select the film mark.
9-82 897N203543D
9.3.4 User Group Management

This section describes the management of user groups.
This setting is available if the user authentication was specified at the time of installation.
(1) Select [User group management].
The "User group management - User Utility" window is displayed.

[Cancel]:

(2) Select a user group to be edited.
(3) Select [Edit].
897N203543D 9-83
The “User group setting - User Utility” window is displayed.
(4) Select functions and place checkmarks in the checkboxes in order to authorize the user
group to use them.
Unchecked functions are not authorized for use.
The user group cannot be changed.
After completing the operations above, select [OK].
9.3.5 Mis-exposure Comment Setting

This section describes how to register, edit, relocate, and delete comments on mis-exposures.
This function is available when inputting a reason for the mis-exposure was specified at the time
of installation.
(1) Select [Setting for comment on mis-exposure].
The “Setting for comment on mis-exposure - User Utility” window is displayed.

After registering a classification of the mis-exposure, you can register preset comments for each
mis-exposure classification.
[Cancel]:
9-84 897N203543D
 Registering the Mis-exposure Classification

This section describes how to register the mis-exposure classification.
(1) Select [Register] from the classification of mis-exposed items.
The “Input classification of mis-exposures - User Utility” window is displayed.
(2) Input the classification and select [OK].
[Cancel]:
 Editing the Mis-exposure Classification

This section describes how to edit a mis-exposure classification.
(1) Select a classification to be edited.
897N203543D 9-85
(2) Select [Edit] from the classification of mis-exposure items.
The “Input classification of mis-exposures - User Utility” window is displayed.
(3) Input the classification and select [OK].
[Cancel]:
 Relocating the Mis-exposure Classification

This section describes how to relocate a mis-exposure classification.
(1) Select a mis-exposure classification to be relocated.
(2) Select (upward) or (downward) to relocate the classification.
9-86 897N203543D
 Deleting a Mis-Exposure Classification

This section describes how to delete a mis-exposure classification.
This operation deletes all preset comments registered to the classification of mis-exposure to be
deleted.
(1) Select a mis-exposure classification to be deleted.
(2) Select [Delete] from the classification of mis-exposure items.
 Registering Preset Comments

This section describes how to register preset comments.
(1) Select a mis-exposure classification for which you wish to register preset comments.
(2) Select [Register] from the preset comments items.
The “Input of comment on mis-exposure - User Utility” window is displayed.
(3) Input a preset comment and select [OK].

[Cancel]:
897N203543D 9-87
 Editing Preset Comments

This section describes how to edit preset comments.
(1) Select a mis-exposure classification and then preset comments to be edited.
(2) Select [Edit] from the preset comments items.
The “Input of comment on mis-exposure - User Utility” window is displayed.
(3) Input a preset comment and select [OK].
[Cancel]
Cancels the editing.
 Relocating Preset Comments

This section describes how to relocate preset comments.
(1) After selecting a mis-exposure classification, select a preset comment to be relocated.
(2) Select (upward) or (downward) to relocate the comment.
9-88 897N203543D
 Deleting Preset Comments

This section describes how to delete a preset comment.
(1) After selecting a mis-exposure classification, select the preset comment to be deleted.
(2) Select [Delete] from the preset comments items.
9.3.6 Anatomic Region Setting

This section describes how to register, edit, and delete anatomic regions.
Availability of this function varies depending on the settings at the time of installation and the
environment.
(1) Select [Anatomic Region Settings].
897N203543D 9-89
The “Anatomic Region Settings window” is displayed.Select [OK] after completing the operations
described below.
([Cancel]  Cancels operation.)
 Registering the Anatomic Region

Explained below is how to register anatomic regions.
The “Anatomic Region Input window” is displayed.
(2) Input necessary information below and then select [OK].

9-90 897N203543D
 Editing Anatomic Region Information

Explained below is how to edit anatomic regions.
(1) Select an anatomic region you wish to edit.
(2) Select [Edit].
The “Anatomic Region Input window” is displayed.
(3) Input necessary information, and then select [OK].

 Deleting Anatomic Region Information

Explained below is how to delete anatomic regions.
(1) Select an anatomic region you wish to delete.

Note that the anatomic regions registered in the exposure menu cannot be deleted.
897N203543D 9-91
9.3.7 View Code Setting

This section describes how to register, edit, and delete view codes.
(1) Select [View Code Settings].
The “View Code Settings window” is displayed.

Select [OK] after completing the operations described below.
9-92 897N203543D
 Registering the View Code

Explained below is how to register a view code.
The “View Code Input window” is displayed.
(2) Input necessary information below, and then select [OK].

The registered view code is displayed in order in the “View Code Input window”.
 [Code Value]
Enter a view code (a maximum of 16 characters).
Enter the coding scheme designator of the view code (a maximum of 16 characters).
 [Coding Scheme Version]
Enter the coding scheme version (a maximum of 16 characters).
 [Code Meaning]
Enter the code meaning of the view code (a maximum of 64 characters).
Note

 If you enter 20 characters or more, some characters may be trimmed. To avoid this,
properly add space between characters.
 Editing View Code Information

Explained below is how to edit a view code.
(1) Select a view code you wish to edit.
897N203543D 9-93
(2) Select [Edit].
The “View Code Input window” is displayed.

 Deleting View Code Information

Explained below is how to delete a view code.
(1) Select a view code you wish to delete.

Note that the view codes registered in the exposure menu cannot be deleted.
9-94 897N203543D
9.3.8 View Modifier Code Setting

This section describes how to register, edit, and delete view modifier codes.
(1) Select [View Modifier Code Sequence Settings].
The “View Modifier Code Sequence Settings window” is displayed.

897N203543D 9-95
 Registering the View Modifier Code

Explained below is how to register a view modifier code.
The “View Modifier Code Sequence Data Input window” is displayed.
(2) Input necessary information below, and then select [OK].

The registered view modifier code is displayed in order in the “View Modifier Code Sequence
Data Input window”.
 [Code Value]
Enter a view modifier code (a maximum of 16 characters).
Enter the coding scheme designator of the view modifier code (a maximum of 16 characters).
 [Coding Scheme Version]
Enter the coding scheme version (a maximum of 16 characters).
 [Code Meaning]
Enter the code meaning of the view modifier code (a maximum of 64 characters).
Note
 If you enter 20 characters or more, some characters may be trimmed. To avoid this,
properly add space between characters.
 Editing View Modifier Code information

Explained below is how to edit a view modifier code.
(1) Select a view modifier code you wish to edit.
9-96 897N203543D
(2) Select [Edit].
The “View Modifier Code Sequence Data Input window” is displayed.

 Deleting View Modifier Code Information

Explained below is how to delete a view modifier code.
(1) Select a view modifier code you wish to delete.

Note that the view modifier code registered in the exposure menu cannot be deleted.
897N203543D 9-97
9.3.9 Text Maker Preset Setting

This section describes how to register, edit, and delete text markers.
Note
 Line feed cannot be registered in the text marker preset via the User Utility.
(1) Select [Text maker preset settings].
The “Text maker preset settings - User Utility” window is displayed.

9-98 897N203543D
 Registering a Text Marker

This section describes how to register a text marker.
(1) Enter a text marker in the [Free text] field (a maximum of 10 characters; * and @ cannot
be used), then select [Register].
 Editing a Text Marker
(1) Select (upward) or (downward) to select the text marker to edit and then select
[Edit].
(2) Edit the text marker in [Free text].
897N203543D 9-99
 Deleting a Text Marker
(1) Select (upward) or (downward) to select the text marker to delete, and then select
[Delete].
 Registering a DICOM Text Marker

Register a DICOM text marker.
(1) Select a desired DICOM text marker from [DICOM marker selection list], and select
[Register].
9-100 897N203543D
 Editing a DICOM Text Marker

Edit a DICOM text marker.
(1) Double-click the prefix or the suffix part of the [DICOM marker selection list].
Note
 Edits of suffixes can be applied only to the ImageAreaDoseProduct and the
TotalIDAPOfSourceImages.
 The DICOM text markers, which appear in [Free text] when a DICOM text marker is
selected, cannot be edited.
List of tags that can be preset in the DICOM text markers

The tags that can be preset in the DICOM text markers are as shown below.
# Tag contents DICOM Tag Prefix (default) = Item Suffix String generation logic
number name
1 Focal Spot Size (0007, F231) Focus - “0”[Small]
“1000”[Large]
“9999”[Auto]
2 Study Date (0008, 0020) StudyDate - Conversion in accordance

with to the date format
setting
3 Exposure Date (0008, 0022) AqusitionDate - Conversion in accordance
with the date format setting
4 Study Time (0008, 0030) StudyTime - Conversion into the
“HH:MM:SS” format
5 Exposure Time (0008, 0032) AqusitionTime - Conversion into the
“HH:MM:SS” format
6 Institution Name (0008, 0080) InstitutionName - -
7 Institutional (0008, 1040) InstitutionalDepartme - -
Department ntName
Name
8 Kanji-Institution (0009, 1080) KanaInstitutionName - -
Name
9 Requesting (0009, 1091) RequestingService - -
Department
897N203543D 9-101
number name
10 Kanji-Requesting (0009, 1092) KanaRequestingServi - -
Department ce
11 Tube Voltage (0018, 0060) KVP KV Round off to the first decimal
place, and convert into an
integer.
12 Distance Source (0018, 1110) DistanceSourceToDet mm -
To Detector ector
13 Distance Source (0018, 1111) DistanceSourceToPati mm -
To Patient ent
14 Exposure Time (0018, 1150) ExposureTime msec -
15 Tube Current (0018, 1151) X-rayTubeCurrent mA -
16 mAs Value (0018, 1153) Exposure mAs  If the (0018, 1153) tag
(0018, 1152) exists and the value is
greater than 0, (0018,
1153) x1/1000 is shown.
 If the (0018, 1153) tag
does not exist or the
value is 0 or less, (0018,
1153) x1/1000 is shown
to three decimal places.
*No zero-padding is done
after the decimal point.
17 Image Area Dose (0018, 115E) ImageAreaDoseProd dGy*cm*cm If a ScallingFactor element
Product (1Shot) uct cGy*cm*cm exists, the area dose product
mGy*cm*cm is multiplied by the value of
uGy*cm*cm that same element.
uGy*m*m (0018,115E)*ScallingFactor
Gy*cm*cm
18 Image Area Dose (0007, F2E2) TotalDAPOfSourceIm dGy*cm*cm * The combined values of
Product ages cGy*cm*cm the source images for
(derivation image) mGy*cm*cm stitching.
uGy*cm*cm
uGy*m*m If a ScallingFactor element
Gy*cm*cm exists, the area dose product
is multiplied by the value of
that same element.
(0018,115E)*ScallingFactor
19 Grid (0018, 1166) Grid - -
20 Target (0018, 1191) Target - “TUNGSTEN”“W”
“MOLYBDENUM”“Mo”
“RHODIUM”“Rh”
21 Thickness (0018, 11A0) Thickness mm -
22 Compression (0018, 11A2) CompForce N -
Force
23 Tomographic (0018, 1470) TomographicAnge ?? -
Angle
24 Tomographic (0018, 1480) TomoTime ?? -
Time
25 Position Type (0018, 1508) PositionType - -
26 Arm Angle (0018, 1510) Angle ° -
9-102 897N203543D
number name
27 Filter (0018, 7050) Filter “MOLYBDENUM”“Mo”
“PHODIUM”“Rh”
“ALUMINUM” or
“ALUMINIUM”“Al”
“COPPER”“Cu”
“NIOBIUM”“Nb”
“EUROPIUM”“Eu”
“LEAD”“Pb”
28 Minimum Filter (0018, 7052) MinimumFilterThickne mm -
Thickness ss
29 Maximum Filter (0018, 7054) MaximumFilterThickn mm -
Thickness ess
30 AEC (0018, 7060) AEC AEC: “MANUAL”[Manual]
“AUTOMATIC”[Auto]
31 Auto Exposure (0018, 7062) AutoExposureControl - -
Control
32 Requesting (0032, 1033) RequestingService - -
Service
33 Hospital Ward (0038, 0300) HospitalWard - -
34 Sickroom (0038, 0400) Sickroom - -
35 Average (0040, 0316) AGD mGy This value is centupled and
Glandular Dose then rounded off to the third
decimal place.
36 Hospital Ward (0040, 2009) HospitalWard - -
37 Entrance Skin (0040, 8302) ESE mGy Round off to the third
Exposure (1 Shot) decimal place.
38 Entrance Skin (0007, F2E6) TotalESEOfSourceIm mGy * The combined values of
Exposure ages the source images for
(derivation image) stitching.
Round off to the third
decimal place.

Note
 The DICOM tag information that has been entered is that entered as text annotation at the
time of entry. Changes after the entry are not applied automatically to the information.
 Like the conventional text annotation, this function does not support automatic annotation.
 In the case of a 0007 group tag, “-” appears for the tag number.
897N203543D 9-103
9.4 Property Setting

This chapter describes the operating environment settings.
(1) Select [Property Setting].
The “Property Setting - User Utility” window is displayed.

After setting necessary items, select [OK]. The description of each item is displayed on the
[Description] field.
[Cancel]:
9-104 897N203543D
 [Time Setting]
Sets the time of this unit. Selecting the button displays the “Date and Time” window of
Windows.
 Setup during a study 1
 [Set study mode for the [Smart-QA] time after system startup.]
Select either one of the following modes for the initial study screen, which appears in
performing a study after the start-up of the Console.
[One-image display]:
One image is shown in the image display field.
897N203543D 9-105
[Six-image display]:
Up to six images are displayed in the image display field.
 [Set the Existing Exposure List When Entering Patient Information]

Select the action for the list of existing exposure menus when receiving new study menus.
[Store Exposure List]:

Keeping the exposure menus selected in the previous study when receiving a
new study.
[Clear Exposure List]:
Clearing the exposure menus selected in the previous study when receiving a
new study.
 [The method at the time pushed "Study Finish" button (There is no unregistration
menu.)]
In case of an exposure menu which read the all images for the study, after selecting
in the “Study screen”, select the action either to finish only the exposure or to
finish both exposure and QA.

The study is displayed in the “Waiting QA list”.
Depending on the settings made in [Image-based Distribution Setting] of
“Distribution setting 1”, this item cannot be selected.
The study is displayed in the “Finish QA list”.
 [The method at the time pushed "Study Finish" button (The unregistration menu
exists.)]
In case of an exposure menu which is not yet reading an image in the study, after selecting
in the “Study screen”, select the action either to delete au unread exposure menu,
to display the menu on the list, or to display the confirmation screen.
If an exposure menu, for which IP has been registered but the image not yet read, is
remaining unprocessed, the study will be suspended for all exposure conditions.
[The unregistration menu is deleted, and study is finished.]:

The study finishes after automatically deleting the exposure menu with no
image. The study finishes with the [The method at the time pushed "Study
Finish" button (There is no unregistration menu.)] method.
[The unregistration menu is not deleted, and study is suspended.]:
The study finishes without deleting the exposure menu with no image.
The study will be listed in the “Waiting Study list”.
[The dialog of the confirmation is indicated.]:
The confirmation dialog to select either to list the exposure menu which does
not have read images or to delete the menu is displayed.
 [Default requesting department]

Select the requesting department in default when receiving new studies.
9-106 897N203543D
 [Sex defined as the default]

Select the sex classification in default when receiving new studies.
 [Trimming Frame Color]
Select [Display Color Setting] to display the [Display Color Setting] window.
Select a color for a trimming frame.
[Cancel]:
Cancels the setting of trimming frame color.
Colors other than the ones on the dialog are also selectable. Select [Arbitrarily selectable.].
A dialog for color is displayed.
After selecting a color, select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the setting of trimming frame color.
897N203543D 9-107
 [Operability using the automatic X-ray detection]

If the setting is made at the time of installation to allow the change in the operation method of
unfinished exposure menus, you can select the desired method. When the automatic X-ray
detection function is enabled for the flat panel sensor, the operation method selected in this
field applies.
[Use Manual Mode (power-saving)]:

When you select an unfinished exposure menu, it blinks. Do not make an
exposure while the menu is blinking, as the flat panel sensor cannot detect X-
rays. Even if you make an exposure, radiation is delivered but an image
cannot be read.
When you select the unfinished exposure menu again while blinking, it stays
on, and the flat panel sensor enters X-ray detection mode.
At this time, Shot Ready (exposure ready status indicator) in the connected
devices status lights green, allowing you to make an exposure.
When you select the unfinished exposure menu again while it is turned on, it
starts blinking, and the flat panel sensor enters X-ray non-detection mode.
X-ray non-detection mode helps restrain the decrease in the operating time of
the battery pack of the flat panel sensor.
[Use Auto Mode]:
When you select an unfinished exposure menu, the flat panel sensor enters X-
ray detection mode.
At this time, Shot Ready (exposure ready status indicator) in the connected
devices status lights green, allowing you to make an exposure.
Note
 Leaving the flat panel sensor in X-ray detection mode, the operating time of the battery
pack may halve.
9-108 897N203543D
 Setup during a study 2
 [Quick Start]
You can set the patient information and study number in detail, which are to be registered
automatically when a study is started with the Quick Start mode.
 For setting of the exposure menu and study menu, refer to “9.2.1.6 Quick Start Mode
Setting”.
897N203543D 9-109
Select the to display the “Quick Start mode Issuance setting” window.
The “Quick Start mode Issuance setting” window can set a patient name and a numbering ID,
which are to be registered automatically when a study is started.
After setting them, select .
To cancel the settings and close the “Quick Start mode Issuance setting” window, select
.
Character strings to be registered on [Patient name]:

Enter a patient name in up to 64 characters, which are registered automatically
in a study to be started with the Quick Start mode. “*”, “=”, “^”, and “\” are not
allowed.
Issuance ID ([Patient ID] or [Accession No.].):
Set the format of the [Patient ID] or the [Accession No.] to be automatically
issued for a study to be started with the Quick Start mode.
An example ID number to be issued according to this setting will appear in the
[Issuance sample] column. Check that the example number is as your
intention and save the setting.
Selecting the number type

Select the [Patient ID #] to issue a patient ID number, and the [Accession No.] to issue an
accession number.
9-110 897N203543D
Selecting items to be included in numbering ID

Select items you want to include in the numbering ID from among the [Item selection and order]
list and put a check mark on the check boxes.
For some items, the detailed setting column appears on the right side of the screen. Set the items
as appropriately.
Item Description Detailed setting column

[System ID] System ID, A to Z (console- Select from the below.
specific ID, set when installation)  Alphabet
 Number
Ex.:
A Console's system ID is [A]
 For [Alphabet], [A] is set.
 For [Number], [1] is set.
[Date: Year] Set a year when the sample ID Select from the below.
number is issued.  Four digit year
 Two digit year
Ex.:
January 31, 2016
 [Four digit year] sets “2016”.
 [Two digit year] sets “16”.
[Date: Month] Set a month in two digits when the
sample ID number is issued.
―
Ex.: For January 31, 2016, “01” is
set.
[Date: Day] Set a day in two digits when the
sample ID number is issued.
―
Ex.: For January 31, 2016, “31” is
set.
[Time: Hour] Set hours of time in two digits
when the sample ID number is
―
issued.
Ex, For 9:30:45, “09” is set.
[Time: Minute] Set minutes of time in two digits
when the sample ID number is
―
issued.
Ex, For 9:30:45, “30” is set.
[Time: Second] Set seconds of time in two digits
when the sample ID number is Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
―
issued.
Ex, For 9:30:45, “45” is set.
[Fixed character string 1] Set fixed character strings. “*”, “%”, “"”, “(”, “)”, and “\” are not allowed.
[Fixed character string 2] Up to six items can be set.
[Fixed character string 3]
897N203543D 9-111
Item Description Detailed setting column

[Serial number] This item must be selected. [Number of Set the number of digits. 1 to 6
Numbers are issued according to digits] digits can be set.
the detailed setting.
[Min. value] Set the minimum value of the
sequential numbers. The
sequential number will start again
from this minimum value after
reset.
[Max. value] Set the maximum value of the
sequential numbers.
The sequential number will start
again from the minimum value after
exceeded the maximum value.
[Increased Enter an integer 1 or more.
rate] The number of digits you can enter
follows the value set in the above
“Number of digits”.
[Reset Select one from among the
condition] following.
 Not reset
 Each time on startup
 Startup date different
At the time of selection, the
sequential number is reset to the
minimum value.
Setting the sequence of items

Connect the items with a check mark from the [Item selection and order] list from the top to
bottom, and issue the numbers for the items. To change the sequence, select a targeted item
and select / .
Note
 The maximum number of characters for the patient ID number and study number depend
on settings at the time of installation.
When the patient ID number and study number to be automatically issued exceed the
maximum number of characters, “*” is displayed. Check the setting.
 If the number of digits for the “Sequential number” is modified, the history for the patient ID
number and study number that were automatically issued may be deleted.
 Setup for starting the next study using the study end button.
After selecting the study end button on the study screen, select whether or not to start the
next study.
[Start the study.]:

The system starts the next study without returning to the Patient Information
Input Screen.
However, the sex classification set in default is selected.
[Not to start the study.]:
The system returns to the Patient Information Input Screen without starting the
next study.
9-112 897N203543D
 Setting the Auto Mammography Image Positioning

Specify whether to execute the positioning of the right and left breast images in the “Study
screen”, when the mammographic positioning is enabled. This option is also available for an
exposure menu set up uniquely.
[Auto Image Positioning is Applied.]:

The positioning of right and left breast images takes place automatically, after
reading images that fulfill the requirements to perform the positioning and
sending the images to the “Study screen”.
[Auto Image Positioning is Not Applied.]:
The positioning of right and left breast images does not take place even after
reading images that fulfill the requirements to perform the positioning and
sending the images to the “Study screen”.
 Mammographic positioning menu settings

Select the desired MPM code used for the mammographic positioning from among MPM
codes for mammography use.
Among the [MPM codes for mammography use], select an MPM code to be registered and
then , or depending on the direction of exposure to be performed.
The selected exposure menu will be listed in the [MPM codes used for mammographic
positioning].
 Auto 2on1 setting for paired left/right image
Displayed if auto pairing is enabled at the time of installation. With this setting enabled, the
film format setting for all exposure menus to be paired changes into the 2-on-1 film format
setting. The paired images can be printed on one film sheet.
 Film format Auto 2on1 setting
The film formats for all images of studies can be set to the 2 on 1 format in a batch. When this
setting is ON, all exposure menus with the one-image format are set to the 2 on 1 format.
897N203543D 9-113
 Character size of long menu names on the study screen

Select the character size to display the exposure menu in the “Exposure Menu Selection
screen”.
This setting is used when the menu name is too long to display.
[Normal size]:
The font size already set in the Console.
[Medium size]:
The font size smaller than the normal size.
[Small size]:
The font size smaller than the medium size.
 Image copy setting

Select whether to take over the source image setting to a copied image.
Trimming: Takes over the trimming setting from a source image.
Marker/Annotation: Takes over the marker/annotation setting from a source image.
 Overlay display item settings for incidental information
You can set the incidental information items to display in the image display area, and where to
display them, for the “Study screen” and “Image Edit screen”. You can also set the size and
color of the incidental information text.
Select to display the “Incidental Information Settings” window.
You can choose the incidental information setting for one-image display or for six-image
display.
In addition, select on the right-hand side of [Copy the setting for one-image
display] to copy the one-image display setting to the six-image display setting. To cancel this
setting, select [Cancel] on the “Incidental Information Settings screen”.
1 Display position on screen

2 List of incidental information
9-114 897N203543D
Follow the procedure below to set overlay items.

Select overlay items to be displayed from the “Incidental Information list” on the right-hand
side of the “Incidental Information Settings” window.
The following items are displayed in the “Incidental Information list”.
[Prefix]:
Prefix of overlay item
[Item names]:
Name of overlay item
[Suffix]:
Unit
In addition, the following overlay items can be displayed.

The information that can only be acquired by the Console is displayed.
 Patient information:
Patient ID, patient’s name, sex, birth date, and age
 Order information:
Accession number, exposure date, exposure time, exposure menu name,
image laterality, and patient orientation

 Image information:
S value, L value, pixel density, tube voltage, tube current, exposure time, mAs
value, image area dose product, target/filter, grid, focal spot size, breast
thickness, compression force, arm angle, AEC, VCS+VMCS, average
glandular dose, entrance skin dose, GA/ GS, EI/DI, GPR, trimming size, panel
name, panel serial number, MG Positioning, image arbitrary rotation degree,
Virtual Grid
 Display attribute information:
Magnification ratio (%) compared to the actual size
897N203543D 9-115
The unit of image area dose product can be switched. Double-click the suffix (unit) column of
image area dose product to display the “Display level setting” window. Select the desired unit
and [OK].
Note
 This changes only units displayed on the “Study window” and “Image Edit window”. The
unit of image area dose product differs when displayed on other windows or terminals. To
check for the incidental information, check values and units together.
 In the following cases, the unit of image area dose product will be “dGy*cm*cm” regardless
of the setting here.
- At the time of delivery, the unit of image area dose product is printed out on a film or
overlaid on the image.
From the left side of the “Incidental Information Settings” window, select the position where you
want to display in the image display area of the “Study screen” and “Image Edit screen” (top left,
top right, bottom left, or bottom right).
A maximum of 10 items can be displayed in one display position.
To delete an item from the left-hand side of the “Incidental Information Settings” window, select
the item to be deleted, and then select .
1 2
1 2
3 4
3 4
1 Top left
2 Top right
3 Bottom left
4 Bottom right
For example, incidental information set to be displayed in the [Top Left] will be displayed in the
top left of the image display areas of the “Study screen” and “Image Edit screen”.
9-116 897N203543D
When “<<” is selected, the name of the overlay item selected in the [Incidental Information] list
is displayed at the left-hand side of the “Incidental Information Settings” window.
Note
 The same item cannot be set in multiple display positions.
 “<<” cannot be selected even if an item already displayed at the left-hand side of the
“Incidental Information Settings” window is selected.
When the image is updated, overlay items are also updated accordingly.
When setting the font size of overlay items, select the size (8/9/10/11/12/14/16/18/20/22/24/26/
28/36/48) from the [Font size] drop-down list at the top left-hand side of the “Incidental
Information Settings” window.
When setting the font color of overlay items, select the color ([Gray]/[Cyan]/[Magenta]/[Yellow])
from the [Font Color] drop-down list at the top left-hand side of the “Incidental Information
Settings” window.
Select [Gray] for a monochrome monitor.
When you click [OK] in the “Incidental Information Settings” window, the current settings are
determined.
Note
 If [Cancel] is selected, the settings will not be reflected in the “Study screen” or “Image Edit
screen”.
897N203543D 9-117
 Image Distribution Setting 1
 [Image-based Distribution Setting]

<[Print output]>
[Distribute automatically at each reading]:

When an image is read, it will be output on a film automatically.
[Distribute the selected images]:
By using the individual delivery button on the “Study screen”, a read image will
be output on a film individually.
[Do not distribute by the image]:
An image is not delivered during a study, but output according to the delivery
setting for each study.
<[Storage output]>
[Distribute automatically at each reading]:

When an image is read, it will be output to a storage device automatically.
[Distribute the selected images]:
By using the individual delivery button on the “Study screen”, a read image will
be output to a storage device individually.
[Do not distribute by the image]:
An image is not delivered during a study, but output according to the delivery
setting for each study.
When selecting either [Distribute automatically at each reading] or [Distribute the selected
images], it is recommended to set “The method at the time pushed “Study Finish” button
(There is no unregistration menu.)” in [Setup during a study 1] tab and [Setup of an automatic
study end] in [Other setting] tab to [Finish exposure and QA].
9-118 897N203543D
Note
 The following two combinations cannot be set. If you attempt such combination of setting,
a warning message will appear.
- [Distribute automatically at each reading] for [Print output] and [Distribute the selected
images] for [Storage output]
- [Distribute the selected images] for [Print output] and [Distribute automatically at each
reading] for [Storage output]
 [Study-based Distribution Setting]
<[Print output]>
[Distribute automatically after the study completion]:

The image is automatically output on a film when the study is complete.
[Distribute automatically after the QA completion]:
When image editing (QA) is completed, the image will be automatically output
on a film.
<[Storage output]>
[Distribute automatically after the study completion]:

The image is automatically output to a storage device when the study is
complete.
[Distribute automatically after the QA completion]:
When image editing (QA) is completed, the image will be automatically output
to a storage device.
 [Setting the reduction ratio for output of an image on 8"x10" film.]

Select whether to reduce the output size to 8” x 10”.
[Reduced image output is not allowed.]:

The image is not reduced to 8”x 10”.
[Reduced image output is allowed.]:
The one-image format is reduced to 8”x10” at the output.
(The 100%-size outputted image of 14”x17” and 14”x14”-sized films is

excluded.)
 [Print output]
Select a printer for a study image. If the first printer is not available, the second printer is used
to output the image.
The appropriate printer for specified film and size is selected according to the specified
“Image size” and “Film format”.
Depending on the printer function, a study film may be output to any other printer.
 [Storage output]
Select a storage unit for a study image.
897N203543D 9-119
 [Output stitched image]

This configures image output to external devices of stitched images.
[Print output]:
Select one of the following images to use for film output.
Source image for stitching:

Outputs the long-view’s source image for stitched.
Source image for stitching, stitched image (14”x17” reduced):
Outputs the source image for stitching and stitched long-view image with size
reduced to 14”x17” film.
Stitched (14”x17” reduced):
Outputs the stitched long-view image with size reduced to 14”x17” film.
Stitched image (life size):
Outputs the stitched long-view image as life size (actual size · outputs the
stitched image split into multiple images to suit the size).
Stitched image (life size), stitched image (14”x17” reduced):
stitched image split into multiple images to suit the size) and the image
reduced to 14”x17” film.
[Storage output]:
Select one of the following images to use for network transfer.
Source image for stitching:

Outputs the long-view’s source image for stitching.
Source image for stitching, stitched image (14"x17" reduced):
Outputs the source image for stitching and stitched long-view image with size
reduced to 14"x17" film.
Stitched images (14"x17" reduced):
Outputs the stitched long-view image with size reduced to 14"x17" film.
Stitched images (life size):
stitched image split into multiple images to suit the size).
Stitched image (life size), stitched images (14"x17" reduced):
stitched image split into multiple images to suit the size) and the image
reduced to 14"x17" film.
Stitched image (life size · non-split):
Outputs the stitched long-view image as life size (actual size · image not split).
Stitched image (life size · non-split), source image for stitching:
Outputs the stitched long-view image as life-size (actual size · image not split)
and the source image for stitching.
9-120 897N203543D
Note
 Life size output is a feature supporting output in actual size. Note, however, that the
following errors may occur depending on the reading and recording devices.
- There is a ±1% error in the total image width.
For example, there would be an error of ±3.5 mm (0.14 in.) in the total width for 14”x17”
size.
 On the following diagnostic imaging imagers, even if life-size output is performed from the
Console, an image reduced to 98% will be output, due to the device specifications.
- DRYPIX 1000, DRYPIX 2000, DRYPIX 3000
 Image Distribution Setting 2
Setting the Position for Layout of Film Annotation When the Medical Examination
Format is Applied:
This setting is available when the 12on1 format function is active.
Select layout of character strings ([Top End] or [Bottom End]) that represent film’s additional
information, when outputting 12 image frames of multiple studies on one film.
[Top End]:
Assigns additional information at top end when applying a medical examination
format.
[Bottom End]:
Assigns additional information at bottom end when applying a medical
examination format.
897N203543D 9-121
Setting the Image Annotation Layout Position When the Medical Examination Format is
Applied:
This setting is available when the 12on1 format function is active.
Select layout of character strings ([Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left] or [Bottom Right]) that
represents image’s additional information, when outputting 12 image frames of multiple studies
on one film.
[Top Left]:
Assigns additional information at top left when applying a medical examination
format.
[Bottom Left]:
Assigns additional information at bottom left when applying a medical
examination format.
[Top Right]:
Assigns additional information at top right when applying a medical examination
format.
[Bottom Right]:
Assigns additional information at bottom right when applying a medical
examination format.
Setting Output of the Medical Examination Format from Media :

This setting is available when both the 12on1 format function and the Media Storage Software
are active.
On the media list, specify whether to output images for multiple studies in 12 frames per film.
[Medical Examination Format is Output.]:
is shown on the media list, and images for multiple studies are output in 12
frames per film.
[No Medical Examination Format is Output.]:
Images for multiple studies stored in the media are not output in 12 frames per
film.
9-122 897N203543D
 Other setting
 [Setup of an automatic study end]

Select an action for the study to which image reading has been completed in the background.

The study stacked in the “Waiting QA list” as the study to which only exposures
have been performed.
Depending on the setting made in [Image-based Distribution Setting] of
“Distribution setting 1”, this item cannot be selected.
The study is stacked in the “Finish QA list” as the study to which exposures
and image editing (QA) have been performed.
[Suspend study]:
Suspends exposures for the study and stacks the study in the “Waiting Study

list”.
 [Auto shutdown timer]

This sets the time till when the automatic shutdown will work.
 For requirements for executing this function, refer to “1.2.2 Common Functions”.
0:
The automatic shutdown does not work.
10 to 300:
Set a time from the last operation of the Console to the shutdown.
897N203543D 9-123
 Other settings 2
 [QA auto-confirmation settings]

Select whether to automatically finalize image edits (QA) of studies saved in the “Waiting QA
list”.
[QA auto-confirmation is not used]:

Does not automatically finalize image edits.
[QA auto-confirmation is used]:
Automatically finalizes edits when the time after the image edit that was input
has elapsed.
 [Initial Screen Display Settings]

Select the screen display after the Console is started up.
[Study Reception Screen]:

Displays the “Patient Information Input screen”.
[Study List Screen]:
Displays the “Study List screen”.
 [Settings of warning time for decreased battery capacity]

In case that the DR cassette is driven by the battery, enter in the User Utility the time at which
a warning appears on the screen. The warning is displayed when the remaining battery
charge falls below the time set in this field.
 [The correction factor when highlighting edges]
Enter a value for MRE (enhancement level of multi-objective frequency processing) and RE
(enhancement level of frequency processing) that is applied when highlighting edges.
9-124 897N203543D
 [Standard image for matching the densities in DR long-view]

Select either of the following two options to specify the standard of image density, when you
perform the auto density adjustment using the Auto Image Stitching Software (DR cassette /
long-view).
[The top menu shall be the standard image.]:

The image taken in the first exposure menu becomes the standard of image
density.
[The selected menu shall be the standard image.]:
The image taken in the exposure menu selected during image stitching
becomes the standard of image density.
 [User notification at the time of application updates]

This option selects whether to notify the user when the application is updated.
[Notify every time]:

Notify every time when the application is updated.
[Automatically update without notification]:
The application is automatically updated without notification.
 [Apply FNC processing for display]

This option selects whether to apply the FNC processing to the displayed image according to
the image processing conditions set previously, when “Study screen” or “Image Editing
screen” appear, or when the image is displayed with the detailed image displaying software.
[Not apply (High-speed display mode)]:

Do not apply the FNC processing.
[Apply as set by menu setting (HD mode)]:
Apply the FNC processing according to the exposure menu setting.
Note
 Because the image applied with the FNC processing requires additional time to be
displayed, the default setting is [Not apply (High-speed display mode)].
897N203543D 9-125
 Performance Setting
 [Trimming-fit Setting]
Image display ratio on the “Study screen” can be set.
The “Image Edit Screen” always show images in the trimming size (trimming fit display)
regardless of the settings here.
[Trimming-fit]:
Displays the read image in the trimming size set to fit in window display.
[Custom magnification]:
Sets the image display ratio to between 100% (trimming fit display) and 70%,
or 0%. If set to 0%, the entire image is displayed to fit in window display.
In the Trimming fit display or [Custom magnification] set to between 100% and 70%, moving
the trimming frame or changing the trimming size redisplays the trimming field to be the
center of the image display field. In addition, when the [Custom magnification] set to 0%, the
entire image is displayed to fit in window display regardless of moving the trimming frame or
changing the trimming size.
 [Default marker display color]
Select the desired default colors for graphical and text markers. The following colors are
available for each marker.
[Graphical marker]:
Text (white)/background (black), text (white)/background (transparent), text
(black)/background (white), text (black)/background (transparent), the last
selected color
[Text marker]:
Text (white)/background (black), text (white)/background (transparent), text
(black)/background (white), text (black)/background (transparent), the last
selected color
9-126 897N203543D
 Selector setting
 [Selector]
After choosing the selector, select the flat panel sensor to combine from the drop-down list.
897N203543D 9-127
9.5 Parameter Batch Updating

This chapter describes how to update all exposure parameters for all exposure menus at a time.
To make use of this function, the User Utility must be started up by authority of super user.
General users are not allowed to use this function.
Note
 Note that all exposure menus are updated after this operation. Also, this operation is
applied to X-ray exposure conditions (tube voltage, tube current, exposure distance, etc.).
Contact our official dealer before using this function.
(1) Select [Parameter Batch Updating].
The “Parameter Batch Updating window” is displayed.
(2) Put check marks for exposure parameters to be updated.
9-128 897N203543D
(3) Select [Execute] after setting the values for exposure parameters.
([Cancel]  cancels operation.)
 [Invert Image]
Select an invert display image. [Frontal Image], [Vertical], [Horizontal], or [180-deg. Rotation]
can be selected.
 [Rotate Image]
This setting specifies the rotation display of the image. [None] or [Rotate 90 degree] can be
selected.
 [Film Output Format]
Select a film output format.
 [Filing Mode]
Select a filing mode for file images to the filing device. Normally [OFF] (do not record) and
[ON] (record) can be selected. If a filing device is not connected, this parameter is not
effective.
 [Pixel Density]
Select pixel density of the image.
 [Film Edge]
Select a color for the film edge (image frame).
 [No. of Output Film]
Set the number of films to be output. This item can be changed either by selecting the arrow
button or by entering a value using the keyboard.
The number of films that can be set varies depending on the setting at the time of installation.
If the filing mode is set to [OFF], do not set this item to [0].
 [Distribution Code]
Select a distribution code (a code number to specify the transfer destination) of the image
from the drop-down list.
 [Tube/Technique code]
Use when X-ray Control Unit is connected.
 [Preset arm angle]
Set the preset arm angle. This item can be changed either by selecting the arrow button or by
entering a value using the keyboard.
897N203543D 9-129
9.6 Backup and Restoration

9.6.1 Backup
This section describes how to backup various information.
Backup the information periodically to prevent possible errors that may occur on the database.
The backup data will be used when restoring the database.
 “9.6.2 Restoration”
(1) Select [Backup].

The “Backup - User Utility” window is displayed.
(2) After selecting the information to be backed

up, select [Start].
A folder selection box is displayed.
9-130 897N203543D
(3) After selecting the drive and the folder, select

[OK].
The backup will be executed.
[Cancel]:
Cancels the backup.
When the backup is completed, a confirmation

box is displayed.
(4) Select [OK].
(5) Select [Terminate].
Note
 If a previous backup file already exists in the backup destination folder, the dialog box
below appears. Do not select “Copy, but keep both files”. Otherwise, the data will not be
restored properly (For Windows 10, do not select both files in the dialog box appears after
“Compare into for both files” is selected).
897N203543D 9-131
9.6.2 Restoration
This section describes how to restore information from backup data.
When trouble occurs on the database, perform the following operations to restore the database.
After this operation, the database is restored to the state at the time when backup is executed.
The updated contents after backup are not reflected.
Note
 It is not possible to restore the information, which was backed up in the system connected
to other Console product or different DR exposure unit.
(1) Select [Restore].

When restoration is performed by using a
medium, insert the latest backed-up medium.
(2) After selecting the drive and the folder, select

[OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the restoration.
The “Restore - User Utility” window is displayed.
9-132 897N203543D
(3) After selecting the information to be

restored, select [Start].
The restoration will be executed.
When the restoration processing is completed, a
confirmation box is displayed.
(4) Select [OK].
(5) Select [Terminate].
897N203543D 9-133
9.7 Patient Information DB Utility

This chapter describes how to perform the maintenance, backup and restoration of the patient
information database.
(1) Select [Patient information DB Utility].

The “Patient Information DB Utility - User Utility”
window is displayed.
Complete the operations described in the

following pages, and select [OK].
Operations for each menu are described in the
following pages.
9.7.1 Patient Information Maintenance

This section describes how to register, edit, and delete the patient information and customizes
the list.
(1) Select [Patient's Information Maintenance].

The patient information list box is displayed.
[Cancel]:
Cancels the maintenance of patient information.
9-134 897N203543D
: Registers patient information to the database.

 “9.7.1 Patient Information Maintenance” - “ Registering Patient
Information”
: Edits patient information.

 “9.7.1 Patient Information Maintenance” - “ Editing Patient
Information”
: Deletes patient information from the database.

 “9.7.1 Patient Information Maintenance” - “ Deleting Patient
Information”
: Customizes a list of patient information.

 “9.7.1 Patient Information Maintenance” - “ Customizing the
Patient Information List”

or : Scrolls patient information.
 Registering Patient Information

This section describes how to register patient information to the database.
(1) Select .
The “Enter patient information” window is displayed.
(2) After inputting patient information, select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the registering of patient information.
897N203543D 9-135
[Patient ID]:
Enter a patient’s ID number. (A maximum number of digits to be entered vary
depending on the setting at the time of installation.)
[Patient's Name]:
[Sex]:
Select / / to input a patient’s sex (M: Male, F: Female

and O: Other).
[Birth Date]:
Input patient’s date of birth. The example of date format is shown in the upper
right of the input field.
[Patient comments]:
Input a comment on patient (a maximum of 1024 characters).
[Implant information]:
Select / / / about the patient’s

implant.
 Editing Patient Information

This section describes how to edit patient information.
(1) Select the tab of the group folder to display the patient information to be edited, and then
select the patient information to be edited.
9-136 897N203543D
(2) Select .
The “Enter patient’s information” window is displayed.
(3) After inputting patient information, select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels editing patient information.
[Patient ID]:
Enter a patient’s ID number. (A maximum number of digits to be entered vary
depending on the setting at the time of installation.)
[Patient's Name]:
[Sex]:
Select / / to input a patient’s sex (M: Male, F: Female

and O: Other).
[Birth Date]:
Input patient’s date of birth. The example of date format is shown in the upper
right of the input field.

[Patient comments]:
Input a comment on patient (a maximum of 1024 characters).
[Implant information]:
Select / / / about the patient’s

implant.
897N203543D 9-137
 Deleting Patient Information

This section describes how to delete patient information from the database.
(1) Select the tab of the group folder to display the patient information to be deleted, and
then select the patient information to be deleted.
(2) Select .
 Customizing the Patient Information List

This section describes how to customize the patient information list (determining the items to be
displayed).
(1) Select .
A dialog box is displayed.

[Cancel]:
Cancels the customization of patient information.
9-138 897N203543D
 Determining the display or non-display of information items

Determines the display or non-display of information items.
Select an information item and then select (display) or (non-display).
Example:
Setting “Patient’s ID #” to be a non-display item
 Changing the display order of information items.

Sets the displaying order of information items.
After selecting an information item, select (move to the left of the list) or Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
(move to the right of the list).
Example:
By pressing the down button, [Patient ID] moves to the right side of the list.
897N203543D 9-139
9.7.2 Import of Patient Information

This section describes how to import patient information from external units and to register it to
the database in batch. The methods, conditions and restrictions of the patient information import
are described below. Prepare an import file based on the information described below.
 Method of Patient Information Import

 When an institution has already equipped with a patient reception terminal unit and has
already built up a patient information database, the patient information exported from the
database of the unit can be imported to the Console by editing it using general application
software.
 The patient information is imported to Console.
Conditions of Importing Files and Patient’s Information
File format:
Text file (TAB delimited)
Recording format:
One record per 1 patient
Record separation code:
CR (0x0D) + LF (0x0A)
File termination code:
EOF (0x1A)
File name:
Practice.csv (fixed)
Patient ID:
A maximum number of digits that can be input vary depending on the setting at
(excluding * and =)
Patient’s Name:
A maximum of 64 characters (excluding *, =, and @)
Sex:
Either one of M/F/O (including lower case letter) is fixed.
9-140 897N203543D
Birth Date:
yyyymmdd (DICOM format), 8 characters are fixed.
Contrast Allergies:
A maximum of 64 characters
Patient comments:
Implants:
0: Nothing (None Or Unknown)
1: Left breast (Left)
2: Right breast (Right)
3: Both breasts (Both left and right)
Restrictions on Importing data

 It is essential to input patient ID, when its duplication is not allowed. If patient ID is input, the
other can be omitted (no input required), and all spaces will be handled as omission (no
input).
 There are the items for register date and last retrieval date in the patient information
database. An import execution date will be registered to them automatically.
 In case that the duplication of patient ID is not allowed, if the patient ID to be imported already
exists in the patient information database, the record will be overwritten.
 In case that the duplication of patient ID is allowed, if an record, which matches all the four
items of patient ID, sex, patient’s name, and birth date, already exists in the patient
information database, the record will be overwritten.
 When a string number of each import information exceeds the maximum string number, the
information is registered without excess characters.
 When a string of sex includes lower case letter, it is registered after changing lower case letter
to upper case letter.
 For the DR-ID 300CL application software V12.1 or later
All of the items are required when importing. If any of the items are missing, then imported
cannot be achieved. If the values for the items are not specified, then leave the setting values
blank in the fields.
Importing patient information
(1) Select [Patient's Information Import].

A file selection dialog is displayed.
897N203543D 9-141
(2) After selecting a file to be imported, select [Open].

File import will be executed.
[Cancel]:
Cancels the import of patient information.
If a message is displayed during importing a file, check the cause and restart the operation.
When the file importing is completed, the “Patient Information DB Utility - User Utility” window is
displayed again.
 Methods to create the patient information file for import

The methods to create the patient information files for import are described below. The methods
using a general note pad application and table calculation application are described as the
examples.
 When creating the importing file, see the conditions and restrictions described in “9.7.2
Import of Patient Information”.
Note
 The product names indicated in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of
manufacturers or sales companies of the products.
CAUTION
 The information indicated in this section is only for reference, and does not explain,
supplement, and/or guarantee any operations (actions) of the application software supplied
by manufacturers other than FUJIFILM Corporation. To use these applications, make sure
to read the documentations of the applications such as the operation manual or help.
FUJIFILM Corporation shall not be liable for any adverse events resulting from the
information contained in this section.
9-142 897N203543D
Using Windows Notepad

The method to create an import file by using Windows Notepad is described below.
(1) Start up “Windows Notepad”.
(2) Input patient information using TAB.

Patient ID[TAB] Patient Name[TAB][TAB]Sex[TAB]Birth Date[TAB]Patient
comments[TAB]Contrast Allergies[TAB]Implant information[ENTER]
Note
 If you use Windows Notepad for the creation, do not include double-quotation (") and Enter
(line break) into the contraindication and the patient information. If you want to include
them, use Microsoft Excel to create a file.
 Input the information from [Patient ID] to [Implant information] according to the conditions of
importing files and patient information.
 In order not to input an item, press the [TAB] key twice.
 [TAB] refers to the [TAB] key on the keyboard, and [ENTER] refers to the [ENTER] key.
 Press the [TAB] key between each item.
 Press [ENTER] key to break a line after [Implant information]. The patient information for only
one patient should be listed on one line.
(3) After patient information is completely inputted, select [File]  [Save As] from the menu.
The “Save As” dialog box is displayed.
(4) Select [All Files] at [Save as type], input

“Practice.csv” at the [File name], and then
select [Save].
897N203543D 9-143
®
Using Microsoft Excel
®
The method to create an import file by using Microsoft Excel is described below.
(1) Start up Microsoft Excel®.
(2) Input patient information in each column.

Column A: Patient ID / Column B: Patient Name / Column C: (Blank) / Column D: Sex / Column
E: Birth Date / Column F: Patient comments / Column G: Contrast Allergies / Column H: Implant
information
 Input the information from [Patient ID] to [Implant information] according to the conditions of
importing files and patient information.
 The patient information for only one patient is listed on one line.
 In order to blank an item, blank the cell. However, “Implant information” cannot be blanked. If
there is no information for “Implant information”, enter 0.
1234567890 Hanako FUJI F 19720715 0
(3) After patient information is completely inputted, select [File]  [Save As] from the menu.
The “Save As” dialog box is displayed.
(4) Select “Text (tab separation)” at [Save as type], and select [Save].
When the following messages are displayed, select [OK] and [Yes].
9-144 897N203543D
(5) Change the name of saved file to "Practice.csv".

When changing the filename, a message like the following appears.
Select [Yes].
Note
 If the file extension is hidden, a filename cannot be displayed correctly. In such a case,
cancel “Hide extensions for known file types.” from the “Folder Options - View” menu in
Windows before changing the filename. (You can also change the filename by using the
“Command Prompt” in the Windows.)
9.7.3 Export of Patient Information

This section describes how to export patient information saves it to media, etc.
(1) Select [Patient information export].

(2) After selecting the drive and the folder, select [OK].
The export is performed.
[Cancel]
Cancels the export.
When the export is completed, a confirmation screen will appear.
897N203543D 9-145
(3) Select [OK].
Note
 If there is already a past file in the export destination folder, the following dialog box
appears.
At this time, do not select “Copy, but keep both files”. If you do so, it will not be imported
correctly (For Windows 10, do not select both files in the dialog box appears after
“Compare into for both files” is selected).
9-146 897N203543D
9.8 Exposure Result Log

This chapter describes how to save or clear the exposure result and mis-exposure logs of
completed studies.
To save or clear the exposure results, the prior setting at the time of installation is required.
(1) Select [Exposure result log].

The “Exposure Result Log - User Utility” window
is displayed.
Complete the operations described below, and select [Terminate].
9.8.1 Saving Logs

The exposure result logs and the rejected film logs of completed studies are exported and saved
into a media.

<About Saving Files>
 Exposure result logs (To save logs, the prior setting is required at the time of installation.)
File format:
File name:
Exposure (fixed) + host name (a maximum of ten characters) + date
(yymmdd) + serial number (four digits) + .txt (extension)
Saving items:
See the following lists. To change the saving items, contact FUJIFILM. Co.,
Ltd. or our official dealer.
897N203543D 9-147
- SOP Instance UID

- Study Instance UID
- Accession Number
- Patient ID
- Patient Name
- Birth Date
- Sex
- Study Date
- Study Time
- MPM Code
- Body Part Examined
- ANK Menu Name
- S-Value
- L-Value
- IP Number
- FCR Image ID
- Technologist Name
- Requesting Department
- size-code
- film-mark1
- film-mark2
Values applied to these items differ depending on setting at the time of installation.
X-ray data may be applied even if the X-ray control function (option) is not installed. The
applied data is the default values for exposure menus.
- Status (MISS/NORMAL)
- Function
- Technologist Code
- IP Number
- Code
- Exposure Index (EI)
- EIt
- Deviation Index (DI)
- Image Area Dose Product
- Entrance Dose in mGy
- Detector Description
- Exposure Control Mode (AUTOMATIC/MANUAL)
- Exposure Control Mode Description
 Mis-exposure result logs (To save the logs, the prior setting is required at the time of
installation.)
File format:
File name:
Reject (fixed) + host name (a maximum of ten characters) + date (yymmdd) +
serial number (four digits) + .txt (extension)
Saving items:
See the following lists. To change the saving items, contact FUJIFILM. Co.,
Ltd. or our official dealer.
9-148 897N203543D
- SOP Instance UID

- Study Instance UID
- Accession Number
- Patient ID
- Patient Name
- Birth Date
- Sex
- Study Date
- Study Time
- MPM Code
- Body Part Examined
- ANK Menu Name
- S-Value
- L-Value
- IP Number
- FCR Image ID
- Technologist Name
- Requesting Department
- size-code
- film-mark1
- film-mark2
Values applied to these items differ depending on setting at the time of installation.
X-ray data may be applied even if the X-ray control function (option) is not installed. The
applied data is the default values for exposure menus.
- Status (MISS/NORMAL)
- Function
- Technologist Code
- IP Number
- Reject Category
- Reject Comment
- Code
- Reject Image
- Exposure Index (EI)
- EIt
- Deviation Index (DI) Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
- Image Area Dose Product
- Entrance Dose in mGy
- Detector Description
- Exposure Control Mode (AUTOMATIC/MANUAL)
- Exposure Control Mode Description
(1) Select [Saves log.].

897N203543D 9-149
(2) After selecting the drive and the folder, select [OK].
The saving logs will be executed.
[Cancel]:
Cancels the saving.
When the saving of exposure results and mis-exposure logs is completed, a confirmation box is
displayed.
(3) Select [OK].

After the log saving is completed, the
confirmation box for clearing the log is displayed.
To clear the current exposure result and mis-
exposure logs, select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the saving.
9-150 897N203543D
9.8.2 Clearing Logs

This section describes how to clear current exposure results and mis-exposure logs.
(1) Select [Clears log.].

The following confirmation box is displayed.
(2) Select [OK].
[Cancel]:
Cancels the clearing logs.
897N203543D 9-151
9.9 Customizing the Screen Display

This chapter describes how to customize the screen display (setting items to be displayed).
(1) Select [Customizing the screen display].

The “Customizing the screen display - User
Utility” window is displayed.
9-152 897N203543D
9.9.1 QA Function Shortcut

QA function is an image processing function which includes image trimming and rotation.
This section describes how to register, relocate and delete the QA shortcut buttons displayed on
the following positions of the “Study screen”. Each of the QA function shortcut buttons is
assigned to each image editing (QA) function.
Study screen (for square monitor):
1
QA function shortcut buttons
Study screen (for wide monitor):

QA function1shortcut buttons
(1) Select [Shortcut for QA function].

The “Customization of the QA function shortcut
button - User Utility” window is displayed.
897N203543D 9-153
 Registering QA Function Buttons

This section describes how to register a QA function shortcut button displayed on the “Study
screen”.
The function names to be registered in the QA function shortcut buttons are listed in the shortcut
buttons list of the following window.
Note
 QA function buttons to be shown in the shortcut buttons list and the number of buttons that
can be registered depend on the type of your monitor.
(1) Select a QA function shortcut button to be displayed on the “Study screen” and move it
directly to the desired position.
The same QA function shortcut button cannot be registered in multiple positions.
Square monitor
: Panning mode
: Magnified image display
: Magnified image display mode
9-154 897N203543D
: Reduced image display mode
: 100%-Size Image
: 1:1-Size Pixel
: Fit in Window display
: Full screen display
: Rotate/Reverse settings
: Image browse
: Switch overlay display
: Smart-QA
: Image scaling display mode (multi touch)
: Rotate 90 degrees to right display
: Rotate 180 degrees display
: Modify S value/L value
: FCR image processing adjustment
: FNC/CRF processing adjustment
: Blackening processing settings
: Image trimming settings
: Marker annotation settings
: Left-right reversal display
: Up-down reversal display
: Rotate 90 degrees to left display
: Mammography Image Positioning Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
: Image processing type (Highlight)
: Image copy
: Free layout print
Wide monitor
: Modify S value/L value
: FCR image processing adjustment
: FNC/CRF processing adjustment
897N203543D 9-155
: Blackening processing settings
: Marker annotation settings
: QA ALL
Note
 If the optional Virtual Grid Software is installed, is displayed instead of .
 Relocating QA Function Shortcut Buttons

This section describes how to relocate a QA function shortcut button on the “Study screen”.
(1) Select a QA function shortcut button to be relocated and move it to the desired position.
If a button is relocated onto the position of another QA function shortcut button, the two buttons
switch the positions.
9-156 897N203543D
 Deleting QA Function Shortcut Buttons

This section describes how to delete a QA function shortcut button on the “Study screen”.
(1) Select a QA function shortcut button to be deleted, and move it onto the icon.
897N203543D 9-157
9.9.2 Customizing the Study List Controller

This section describes how to register, relocate, and delete the buttons displayed on the study
list controller of the “Study List screen”.
Study List screen:
Study list controller
1
(1) Select [Customize the study list controller].

The “Customize the study list controller- User
Utility” window appears.
Perform the operations described below, and then click [OK].
9-158 897N203543D
 Registering a Study List Control Button

This registers a button to be displayed on the study list controller of the “Study List screen”.
A list of function names that can be registered to the study list controller is shown in the “List of
controller buttons for the study list”.
You can add up to five study list control buttons.
(1) Select a study list control button to display, and move it to the desired location.
 Relocating a Study List Control Button

This changes the position of a study list control button.
(1) Select study list control button to relocate, and move it to the desired location.
If a button is relocated onto the location of another study list control button, the two buttons switch
the locations.
897N203543D 9-159
 Deleting a study list control button

This deletes a study list control button.
(1) Select study list control button to delete, and move it to .
9.9.3 Customizing the QA Function Buttons

This section describes how to register, relocate, and delete a QA function button to be displayed
on the “Image Edit screen”.
Image Edit Screen:
1 QA function button display field
9-160 897N203543D
(1) Select [QA function button customize].

The “QA Function Buttons customization - User
897N203543D 9-161
 Registering a QA Function Button

This section describes how to register a QA function button to be displayed in the palette of the
“Image Edit screen”.
The function names that can be registered in the QA function button display field are on the “QA
Function Button list”.
(1) Select the QA function button to display, and move it as is to the desired location.
: Order information
: S value/L value
: FNC/CRF
: Shadow-Masking Processing
: Image Stitching
: Exposure List
: ROI measurement
: Image rotation/reversal
: Image Processing
: Marker
: Trimming
: Distribution Setting
: Mammography Image Positioning
Note
 If the optional Virtual Grid Software is installed, is displayed instead of .
9-162 897N203543D
 Relocating QA Function Buttons

This section describes how to relocate a QA function button in the palette. This section describes
how to relocate a QA button in the palette.
(1) Select a QA function button to be relocated and move it to the desired position.
If a button is relocated onto the position of another QA function button, the two buttons switch
the positions.
 Deleting QA Function Buttons

This section describes how to delete a QA function button in a palette.
(1) Select a QA function button to be deleted, and move it onto the icon.
897N203543D 9-163
9.9.4 Customizing the QA Controller Buttons

This section describes how to register, relocate and delete a QA image controller button to be
displayed in the QA image controller (as shown below) of the “Image Edit screen”.
Image Edit screen:
QA Image Controller
(1) Select [QA control button customize].

The “Customization of the QA image controller -
User Utility” window is displayed.
9-164 897N203543D
 Registering QA Image Controller Buttons

This section describes how to register a QA image controller button to be displayed in the QA
image controller of the “Image Edit screen”.
Function names to be registered in the QA image controller is listed in the [Function list].
Up to 13 slots on the QA image controller can be used.
(1) Select a QA image controller button to be displayed in the QA image controller, and
move it directly to the desired place.
However, the same QA image controller button cannot be registered in multiple places.
or : Scrolls the QA image controller buttons.
 Relocating QA Image Controller Buttons

This section describes how to relocate a QA image controller button in the QA image controller.
(1) Select a QA image controller button to be relocated and move it to the desired position.
If a button is relocated onto the position of another QA image controller button, the two buttons
switch the positions.
or : Scrolls the QA image controller buttons.
897N203543D 9-165
 Deleting QA Image Controller Buttons

This section describes how to delete a QA image controller button in the QA image controller.
(1) Select a QA button to be deleted, and move it onto the icon.
9-166 897N203543D
9.9.5 Image area operation

When using the wide monitor, the buttons to be displayed in the image area operation of the
“Study screen” can be registered, relocated, or deleted.
Study screen (for wide monitor)
Image area operation
(1) Select [Image area operation customization].

The “Image area operation customization”
After performing the following operations, select [OK].
897N203543D 9-167
 Registering the Button in the Image area operation

The buttons displayed in the image area operation of the “Study screen” can be registered for
wide monitor. Function names to be registered for the buttons in the image area operation are
listed in the Shortcut buttons list.
A maximum of seven boxes are available for the buttons in the image area operation.
(1) Select a button to be displayed in the image area operation of the “Study screen” and
move it to the desired location.
Identical button in the image area operation can not be registered to a number of locations.
: Left-right reversal display
: Rotate 180 degrees display
: Rotate 90 degrees to left display
: Up-down reversal display
: Rotate 90 degrees to right display
: Switch overlay display
: 100%-Size Image
: 1:1-Size Pixel
: Image copy
: Fit in Window display
: Smart-QA
: Full screen display
: Image processing type (Highlight)
: Trimming marker move mode
: Image scaling display mode (multi touch)
: Gradation change mode
: Change monitor mode
9-168 897N203543D
 Relocating the Buttons in the Image area operation

The buttons displayed in the image area operation of the “Study screen” can be relocated.
(1) Select the button in the image area operation to be relocated, and move it to the desired
position.
If a button is relocated onto the position of another button in the image area operation, the two
buttons switch the positions.
 Deleting the Buttons in the Image area operation

The buttons can be deleted from image area operation of the “Study screen”.
(1) Select the buttons in the Image area operation to be deleted, and move it onto .
897N203543D 9-169
9.9.6 Image Display Setting

This section describes the setting method to display the buttons on the “Study screen” and
“Study List screen”.
Study screen (for square monitor):
1 Study screen buttons
Study screen (for wide monitor):
1 Study screen buttons
9-170 897N203543D
(1) Select [Image display settings].

The “Image display setting information - User
After selecting buttons to be displayed on the
screen, select [OK].
[Cancel]:
 [Button Display on Study Screen]

Select the buttons to be displayed on the “Study screen”.
Note Chapter 9 User Utility Operations

 Selectable buttons depend on the type of your monitor.
 [Study List Screen]
Select the buttons to be displayed on the “Study List screen”.
897N203543D 9-171
9.9.7 Exposure Parameter Shortcut

This section describes how to register/relocate/delete exposure parameter shortcut buttons
displayed on the “Study screen” as shown below. The exposure parameter shortcut buttons are
shortcut icons used for each setting box of exposure parameter.
Study screen:
(1) Select [Shortcut for exposure parameters].

The “Customization of the exposure parameter
shortcut button-User Utility” window will be
displayed.
Select [OK] after completing the operations described hereinafter.
9-172 897N203543D
 Registering Exposure Parameter Shortcut Buttons

This section describes how to register the exposure parameter shortcut buttons to be displayed
on the “Study screen”.
Function names that can be registered in exposure parameter shortcut buttons are listed in the
“Shortcut button list”.
Note
 The number of the buttons that can be registered depends on the type of your monitor.
(1) Select a button to be displayed on the “Study screen”, and move it to the desired place.
The same button cannot be registered in multiple places.
: EDR Mode Setting
: Filing Mode settings
897N203543D 9-173
: Function settings
: Distribution settings (image distribution code)
: The number of film prints settings
: Radiation field settings
: Output pixel density settings
: GPR settings (optional)
: Panel AP mode connection switching
 Relocating Exposure Parameter Shortcut Buttons

This section describes how to relocate exposure parameter shortcut buttons on the “Study
screen”.
(1) Select a button to be relocated and move it to the desired place.
If the button is moved onto the place where other exposure parameter shortcut button has
already been placed, the latter will be replaced with the relocated button.
9-174 897N203543D
 Deleting Exposure Parameter Shortcut Buttons

This section describes how to delete exposure parameter shortcut buttons on the “Study screen”.
(1) Select an exposure parameter shortcut button to be deleted, and move it onto the
icon.
897N203543D 9-175
9.9.8 Customizing the Connected Devices Status

This section describes how to register, reposition, or delete device information displayed in the
connected devices status in the lower right of the screen.
Study screen:
Connected devices status
(1) Select [Connected device status

customization].
The “Connected device status customization”
After the following operations, select [OK].
9-176 897N203543D
 Registering device information to be displayed

Device information to be displayed in the connected devices status can be registered.
The connected device status can display device information in three categories, and show up to
seven items.
 “7.1.1 Connected Devices Status”
<Example of display setting>
1 2 3
1 Category 1
2 Category 2
3 Category 3
4 Category name
The following can be registered on the “Connected device status customization” window.
 [Arrangement order] Chapter 9 User Utility Operations
Select from the dropdown list which one from the left a category is to be shown.
 [Caption]
Input character strings to be displayed as a category name.
 [Display items]
Set display items in the category. Select a display item from the list and move it to the desired
position. The same item cannot be registered to multiple positions.
897N203543D 9-177
: Communication status indicator
: Battery indicator
: Grid indicator
: Console indicator
: Console battery indicator
: Starting the General RIS Browser Software
: Console wireless communication indicator
: Order issuance device indicator
: XCON indicator
: Output status indicator
: Wireless communication status indicator
9-178 897N203543D
 Changing the display position of device information

Display items in the category can be repositioned.
(1) Select an item to be repositioned and move it to the desired position.
If you move an item to the position already filled, its item will be replaced with the already filled
item. To reposition a category, change [Arrangement order] of each category.
 Deleting device information

Display items in the category can be deleted.
(1) Select an item to be deleted and move it to .
897N203543D 9-179
9.10 Calculating the Use Frequency

This calculates and displays how many times each IP and flat panel sensor has been used.
(1) Select [Calculate Use Frequency].

The “Calculate Use Frequency - User Utility”
window will be displayed.
Perform necessary operations for each menu, and then select [OK].
9.10.1 Narrow-down Searching

The use count list can be used to show the number of times the IPs and flat panel sensors
matching the specified search conditions have been used. This action is called [Narrow-down
Searching]. You can narrow the search by specifying the host name, barcode number, or size as
the search conditions.
(1) Select [Narrow-down Searching].
The “Narrow-down Searching Dialog - User Utility” window will open.

Input target and key character string for the narrow-down conditions and then select [OK].
9-180 897N203543D
9.10.2 Outputting the List Files

The information listed in the “Calculate Use Frequency - User Utility” window can be output and
saved to a file in “.csv” format.
(1) Select [Outputting the List File].

The Windows “Save As” dialog box then opens.
Input a filename in the “File name” box and select “Save”.
9.10.3 Resetting the Use Count

It is possible to reset the usage counts for the IPs and flat panel sensors displayed in the Use
Count list.
(1) Select [Resetting the Count How Many Times the IP Was Used].
897N203543D 9-181
9-182 897N203543D

ConsoleAdvance RG 897N203543D 5 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ConsoleAdvance RG 897N203543D 5 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ConsoleAdvance RG 897N203543D 5 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

300CL_Reference.

book Page i Thursday, June 8, 2023 4:46 PM

Reference Guide 1 Operation Flow

Version 5 2023-06-08 2 Study Reception

3 Exposure Menu Registration

7 Connected Devices Status

Functions when Using the

9 User Utility Operations

Detailed information about how to use this product as well

Chapter 1 Operation Flow

Chapter 2 Study Reception

Chapter 3 Exposure Menu Registration

Chapter 5 Editing Images

Chapter 6 List Operation

Chapter 7 Connected Devices Status

Chapter 8 Functions when Using the Mobile PC

Chapter 9 User Utility Operations

Chapter 1 Operation Flow 1-1

1.1 Operation Screen ....................................................................................................... 1-1

Chapter 2 Study Reception 2-1

2.1 Study Reception ......................................................................................................... 2-1

Chapter 3 Exposure Menu Registration 3-1

3.1 Exposure Menu Registration ...................................................................................... 3-1

Chapter 4 Executing Studies 4-1

4.1 Executing Studies....................................................................................................... 4-1

 Manual positioning ................................................................................... 4-41

Chapter 5 Editing Images 5-1

5.1 Image Edit Screen...................................................................................................... 5-1

5.4.2 Rotation/Reversal Settings........................................................................... 5-15

5.6.4 Locking Study Data ...................................................................................... 5-62

Chapter 6 List Operation 6-1

6.1 List.............................................................................................................................. 6-1

Chapter 7 Connected Devices Status 7-1

7.1 Connected Devices Status ......................................................................................... 7-1

7.2 Detailed Information Display Window......................................................................... 7-6

Chapter 8 Functions when Using the Mobile PC 8-1

8.1 Functions when using the mobile PC ......................................................................... 8-1

Chapter 9 User Utility Operations 9-1

9.1 Before Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-1

 Creating Exposure Menus ....................................................................... 9-35

9.3.3 Film Mark Setting ......................................................................................... 9-79

9.7 Patient Information DB Utility ................................................................................. 9-134

This Reference Guide applies to the following software.

Copyright © 2021-2023 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

      

# $ $'"# '"$"%"# $$%! $##!$ 

# 6$,'%5515*'5'3/4#0&%10&+5+1041(5*+4 )3''/'05:16#3')3#05'&#.+/+5'&010'9%.64+7'01053#04('3#$.'

&"#! 5+4#%-018.'&)'&#0&#)3''&5*#53'5#+04#..5+5.'#0&3+)*54515*'1(58#3'5*' 1%6/'05#5+10#0&#..

 #$"$  # "16/#:+/#-'#0&3'5#+010''953#%12:1(5*'1(58#3'(13$#%-62263214'410.: #0&++%12:5*'

 '! "$ $"  "164*#..%1/2.:8+5*#..'92135#0&3''921353'453+%5+104#0&3')6.#5+104+/214'&$:5*')17'30/'051(5*'

 !$!" /#:#5+5441.'&+4%3'5+10/#-'#0:62&#5'1362)3#&'1(5*'1(58#3'#7#+.#$.' *18'7'3

"" %# # *+4 )3''/'054*#..$')17'30'&$:#0&%104536'&#%%13&+0)515*'.#841(#2#0'9%.6&+0)+54

1.1 Operation Screen

1.1.1 Receiving Studies

Chapter 1 Operation Flow

To input the patient information from the patient’s

“Patient Information Input screen”

“Patient Information Selection box”

Chapter 1 Operation Flow

# $ $'"# '"$"%"# $$%! $##!$

# 6$,'%5515'5'3/4#0&%10&+5+1041(5+4 )3''/'05:16#3')3#05'&#.+/+5'&010'9%.64+7'01053#04('3#$.'

&"#! 5+4#%-018.'&)'&#0&#)3''&5#53'5#+04#..5+5.'#0&3+)54515'1(58#3'5' 1%6/'05#5+10#0&#..

#$"$ # "16/#:+/#-'#0&3'5#+010''953#%12:1(5'1(58#3'(13$#%-62263214'410.: #0&++%12:5'

'! "$ $" "164#..%1/2.:8+5#..'92135#0&3''921353'453+%5+104#0&3')6.#5+104+/214'&$:5')17'30/'051(5'

!$!" /#:#5+5441.'&+4%3'5+10/#-'#0:62&#5'1362)3#&'1(5'1(58#3'#7#+.#$.' 18'7'3

"" %# # +4 )3''/'054#..$')17'30'&$:#0&%104536'&#%%13&+0)515*'.#841(#2#0'9%.6&+0)+54